construction document specifications...construction document specifications for the north hagerstown...

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SPECIFICATIONS

for the

NORTH HAGERSTOWN HIGH SCHOOL

HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue

Hagerstown, Maryland 21742

BFM PROJECT NO. 14086

OWNER WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS

10435 DOWNSVILLE PIKE HAGERSTOWN, MD 21740

BOARD OF EDUCATION OF WASHINGTON COUNTY Donna L. Brightman, President

Justin M. Hartings, Vice President Jaqueline B. Fisher Michael Guessford Karen Harshman

Wayne D. Ridenour Melissa A. Williams

WASHINGTON COUNTY SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS

DR. CLAYTON M. WILCOX, Ed. D.

March 13, 2015

PREPARED BY: BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC.

473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740

301-733-5600

Specification Index – Page 1

WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS NORTH HAGERSTOWN HIGH SCHOOL - HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION BFM PROJECT NO. 14086

SPECIFICATION INDEX

DIVISION 0 - CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Section 00 01 00 - Directory Section 00 11 16 - Invitation to Bid Section 00 20 00 - Standard Form of Proposal Section 00 20 50 - WCPS Bid Affidavit Section 00 20 60 - No Bid Reply Form 2015-02 Section 00 21 13 - AIA Document A701-1997 – Instructions to Bidders by WCBOE Section 00 43 13 - AIA Document A310-2010 – Bid Bond Section 00 52 13 - AIA Document A101-2007 – Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner &

Contractor Section 00 52 14 - WCPS Contract Affidavit Section 00 61 13.13 - AIA Document A312-2010 – Performance Bond Section 00 61 13.16 - AIA Document A312-2010 – Payment Bond Section 00 62 76 - AIA Documents G702-1992 and G703-1992 - Pay Application Section 00 65 16 - AIA Document G704-2000 – Certificate of Substantial Completion Section 00 72 13 - AIA Document A201-1997 – General Conditions (Unedited) Section 00 72 14 - AIA Document A201-1997 – General Conditions – WCPS Supplement DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work 01 10 00-1 - 01 10 00-9 Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00-1 Section 01 27 00 - Applications for Payment 01 27 00-1 - 01 27 00-3 Section 01 28 00 - Change Order Procedures 01 28 00-1 - 01 28 00-2 Proposal Request Form 1 page Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements 01 31 00-1 - 01 31 00-4 Section 01 32 30 - Network Analysis Schedule 01 32 30-1 - 01 32 30-6 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-1 - 01 33 00-5 Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1 - 01 40 00-4 Section 01 45 00 - Cutting and Patching 01 45 00-1 - 01 45 00-2 Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 50 00-1 - 01 50 00-4 Section 01 50 60 - Construction Indoor Air Quality 01 50 60-1 - 01 50 60-10 Section 01 54 60 - Safety and Health 01 54 60-1 - 01 54 60-4 Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 01 60 00-1 - 01 60 00-4 Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements 01 73 00-1 - 01 73 00-7 Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds 01 74 00-1 - 01 74 00-2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK Section 02 22 50 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling 02 22 50-1 - 02 22 50-4 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00-1 - 03 20 00-3 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00-1 - 03 30 00-6 Section 03 34 60 - Concrete Floor Finishing 03 34 60-1 - 03 34 60-2 Section 03 37 00 - Concrete Curing 03 37 00-1 - 03 37 00-2 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing 06 11 40-1 - 06 11 40-2 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 06 20 00-1 - 06 20 00-4 Section 06 41 00 - Custom Casework 06 41 00-1 - 06 41 00-5 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation 07 21 00-1 - 07 21 00-4 Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers 07 90 00-1 - 07 90 00-4


DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 00-1 - 08 11 00-3 Section 08 21 00 - Wood Doors 08 21 00-1 - 08 21 00-3 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 08 71 00-1 - 08 71 00-9 Section 08 80 00 - Glazing 08 80 00-1 - 08 80 00-8 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09 11 10 - Metal Stud Framing System 09 11 10-1 - 09 11 10-4 Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems 09 26 00-1 - 09 26 00-6 Section 09 31 00 - Ceramic Tile 09 31 00-1 - 09 31 00-9 Section 09 51 10 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 10-1 - 09 51 10-5 Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 09 65 00-1 - 09 65 00-4 Section 09 90 00 - Painting 09 90 00-1 - 09 90 00-6 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10 10 50 - Visual Display Boards 10 10 50-1 - 10 10 50-4 Section 10 44 10 - Signage 10 44 10-1 - 10 44 10-2 Section 10 80 00 - Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 80 00-1 - 10 80 00-4 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 51 20 - Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 51 20-1 - 12 51 20-3

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SPECIFICATIONS

for the


HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue


BFM PROJECT NO. 14086

OWNER WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS

10435 DOWNSVILLE PIKE HAGERSTOWN, MD 21740

BOARD OF EDUCATION OF WASHINGTON COUNTY Donna L. Brightman, President

Justin M. Hartings, Vice President Jaqueline B. Fisher Michael Guessford Karen Harshman

Wayne D. Ridenour Melissa A. Williams

WASHINGTON COUNTY SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS

DR. CLAYTON M. WILCOX, Ed. D.

March 13, 2015

PREPARED BY: BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC.


301-733-5600


WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS NORTH HAGERSTOWN HIGH SCHOOL - HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION BFM PROJECT NO. 14086

SPECIFICATION INDEX

DIVISION 0 - CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Section 00 01 00 - Directory Section 00 11 16 - Invitation to Bid Section 00 20 00 - Standard Form of Proposal Section 00 20 50 - WCPS Bid Affidavit Section 00 20 60 - No Bid Reply Form 2015-02 Section 00 21 13 - AIA Document A701-1997 – Instructions to Bidders by WCBOE Section 00 43 13 - AIA Document A310-2010 – Bid Bond Section 00 52 13 - AIA Document A101-2007 – Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner &

Contractor Section 00 52 14 - WCPS Contract Affidavit Section 00 61 13.13 - AIA Document A312-2010 – Performance Bond Section 00 61 13.16 - AIA Document A312-2010 – Payment Bond Section 00 62 76 - AIA Documents G702-1992 and G703-1992 - Pay Application Section 00 65 16 - AIA Document G704-2000 – Certificate of Substantial Completion Section 00 72 13 - AIA Document A201-1997 – General Conditions (Unedited) Section 00 72 14 - AIA Document A201-1997 – General Conditions – WCPS Supplement DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work 01 10 00-1 - 01 10 00-9 Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00-1 Section 01 27 00 - Applications for Payment 01 27 00-1 - 01 27 00-3 Section 01 28 00 - Change Order Procedures 01 28 00-1 - 01 28 00-2 Proposal Request Form 1 page Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements 01 31 00-1 - 01 31 00-4 Section 01 32 30 - Network Analysis Schedule 01 32 30-1 - 01 32 30-6 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-1 - 01 33 00-5 Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1 - 01 40 00-4 Section 01 45 00 - Cutting and Patching 01 45 00-1 - 01 45 00-2 Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 50 00-1 - 01 50 00-4 Section 01 50 60 - Construction Indoor Air Quality 01 50 60-1 - 01 50 60-10 Section 01 54 60 - Safety and Health 01 54 60-1 - 01 54 60-4 Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 01 60 00-1 - 01 60 00-4 Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements 01 73 00-1 - 01 73 00-7 Section 01 74 00 - Warranties and Bonds 01 74 00-1 - 01 74 00-2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK Section 02 22 50 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling 02 22 50-1 - 02 22 50-4 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00-1 - 03 20 00-3 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00-1 - 03 30 00-6 Section 03 34 60 - Concrete Floor Finishing 03 34 60-1 - 03 34 60-2 Section 03 37 00 - Concrete Curing 03 37 00-1 - 03 37 00-2 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing 06 11 40-1 - 06 11 40-2 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 06 20 00-1 - 06 20 00-4 Section 06 41 00 - Custom Casework 06 41 00-1 - 06 41 00-5 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation 07 21 00-1 - 07 21 00-4 Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers 07 90 00-1 - 07 90 00-4


DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 00-1 - 08 11 00-3 Section 08 21 00 - Wood Doors 08 21 00-1 - 08 21 00-3 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 08 71 00-1 - 08 71 00-9 Section 08 80 00 - Glazing 08 80 00-1 - 08 80 00-8 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09 11 10 - Metal Stud Framing System 09 11 10-1 - 09 11 10-4 Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems 09 26 00-1 - 09 26 00-6 Section 09 31 00 - Ceramic Tile 09 31 00-1 - 09 31 00-9 Section 09 51 10 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 10-1 - 09 51 10-5 Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 09 65 00-1 - 09 65 00-4 Section 09 90 00 - Painting 09 90 00-1 - 09 90 00-6 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10 10 50 - Visual Display Boards 10 10 50-1 - 10 10 50-4 Section 10 44 10 - Signage 10 44 10-1 - 10 44 10-2 Section 10 80 00 - Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 80 00-1 - 10 80 00-4 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 51 20 - Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 51 20-1 - 12 51 20-3

DIVISION 0

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC.


301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

SECTION 00 01 00

DIRECTORY

DIRECTORY

WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS NORTH HAGERSTOWN HIGH SCHOOL

HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION BFM No. 14086

OWNER: WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS FACILITIES DEPARTMENT 10435 Downsville Pike Hagerstown, MD 21740 Traci Coldsmith, Project Manager e-mail: [email protected] Telephone: 301-766-2887 Fax: 301-766-2867 ARCHITECT: BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 North Potomac Street Hagerstown, MD 21740 Brent A. Feight: Principal In Charge e-mail: [email protected] Aaron K. House, Project Architect e-mail: [email protected] Telephone: 301-733-5600 Fax: 301-733-5612

MECH/PLMB/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: KIBART, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 901 Dulaney Valley Road Towson, MD 21204 John McClain/Mechanical e-mail: [email protected] Nadine Hawkins/Electrical e-mail: [email protected] Telephone: 410-494-1111 Fax: 410-494-1112

mailto:[email protected]





SECTION 00 11 16

INVITATION TO BID

10435 Downsville Pike Hagerstown MD 21740

301-766-2800

Page 1 of 5

INVITATION TO BID

March 16, 2015

Bid: #2015-38, Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School Pre-Bid Meeting: Tuesday, March 24, 2015 at 4:00 PM Local Time

at North Hagerstown High School, 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, Hagerstown, MD 21742

Questions Due: Wednesday, April 1, 2015 at 4:30 p.m.

Bid Inquiries to: Mrs. Lisa C. Freeman, C.P.M.

Supervisor of Purchasing (WCPS) Phone (301) 766-2842; Email: [email protected] Please copy Traci Coldsmith at [email protected]

Date and Hour of Bid Opening: Thursday, April 9, 2015 at 2:00 PM Local Time

Bids shall be submitted in duplicate, along with additional documentation required per the Bid Solicitation instructions, in a Sealed Envelope showing Bid Name and Due Date on the outside of the envelope. Faxed or Emailed bids will not be accepted. Bids delivered in person should be handed to a Purchasing Department staff member prior to the bid due date/time to ensure the bid is properly filed in advance of the Bid Opening.

Bids not received prior to the day/time designated for the bid opening, or bids not submitted to the Purchasing Staff, may not be properly filed. Such bids, upon discovery by the Purchasing Official, will be refused and/or returned unopened to the Bidder. The Purchasing Department is open Monday through Friday, 8:00 am – 12:00 pm and 1:00 pm – 4:30 pm local time, except national and school holidays.

Place of Bid Opening: WCPS Center for Education Services 10435 Downsville Pike, Hagerstown, MD 21740




301-766-2800

Page 2 of 5

Address Mail or Delivery Package to: Attention Lisa C. Freeman, Supervisor of Purchasing Telephone: (301) 766-2842

TO VIEW CURRENT SOLICITATIONS, PLEASE SEE THIS WEB ADDRESS:

http://wcpspurchasing.com/bids/opportunities

FOR BID RESULTS, PLEASE SEE THIS WEB ADDRESS: http://wcpspurchasing.com/bids/results

Bid Solicitation Document includes the following: √ Instructions to Bidders (AIA A701) √ General Conditions (AIA A201) √ Technical Specifications √ Affidavit to Bid √ Terms & Conditions (AIA A101) √ Signature Sheet √ Plans/Drawings/Schematics √ Proposal Form √ “No-Bid” Reply Form

http://wcpspurchasing.com/bids/opportunities

http://wcpspurchasing.com/bids/results


301-766-2800

Page 3 of 5

INVITATION TO BID, CONTINUED

NOTICE Notice is hereby given that Washington County Public Schools will accept sealed bids for the purpose of establishing a contract to perform interior renovations for the Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School. The Contract /Bid Solicitation Documents were prepared by Bushey Feight Morin Architects. (the Architect) and Washington County Public Schools (the Owner). Below is a summary of the project: The successful Bidders shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, performing the work specified in the enclosed Technical Specifications and Drawings for the construction project Bid# 2015-38, Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School, located at 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, Hagerstown, Maryland 21742. Minority Business Enterprise participation procedures are not applicable to the bid and construction project. The construction contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder with consideration given to quantities involved; time required for delivery; the purpose for which required; the competency and responsibility of the bidder; and the ability of the bidder to perform satisfactory service. The Washington County Board of Education (“WCBOE”) may reject any and all bids and re-advertise for other bids. BIDS DUE Sealed bids will be received at the Washington County Public Schools Center for Education Services Purchasing Office at 10435 Downsville Pike, Hagerstown, Maryland, 21740 by 2:00 PM local time Thursday, April 9, 2015. Bids will be opened and read aloud at that time. Bids received after that time will not be accepted and will be returned unopened. Interested parties are invited to attend. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a minimum period of sixty (60) calendar days after the day of the bid opening.


301-766-2800

Page 4 of 5

BID SOLICITATION AVAILABILITY Contractors may obtain the files that comprise the Bid Solicitation Document from the Purchasing Website on the following basis:

1. The solicitation document is available for viewing and download from the WCPS Purchasing Web site:

www.wcpspurchasing.com. The bid solicitation document is made available to any person or company who chooses to obtain it from the website. PREQUALIFICATION TO SUBMIT A BID IS A REQUIREMENT. ALL CONTRACTORS WHO have obtained a copy of the document from the website or by other means may not be eligible to submit a bid. Only the WCPS Purchasing Office can grant approval to bid. Only pre-qualified contractors are eligible to bid this project. Registration via the WCPS website is mandatory and is a two-step process. Approval at step one of the application is not sufficient for bidding construction work. WCPS Purchasing Office will notify each contractor in writing upon approval of the application to bid construction projects.

2. To check whether or not your company is pre-qualified, you may contact the Purchasing Office by calling Beverly Bergan at 301-766-2841, or by email to: [email protected]. The Bid Solicitation consists of electronic files which provide instructions, technical specifications, drawings, and supplemental addenda issued prior to the bid opening.

3. The Bidder assumes all responsibility for downloading all electronic files and for coordinating any pertinent information contained in the Bidding Documents. Downloading/viewing only specific files or partial information will not relieve the contractor or subcontractor from the work indicated on other drawings or specifications comprising the complete bid solicitation.

4. Bids received from contractors who have not been pre-qualified seven days prior to the bid opening date may be refused or returned unopened to them. To become pre-qualified, complete the Prequalification Registration online by visiting our website, http://wcpspurchasing.com/vendors-contractors/becoming-wcps-vendor.

5. Contractors and subcontract bidders must be licensed to perform construction work in the State of

Maryland in order to be eligible to bid. Contractors must meet WCPS’ eligibility requirements in order to bid this project as a prime bidder.

MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE) This bid /project is not subject to Minority Business Enterprise Procedures. Certified Minority Business Enterprises are encouraged to respond to this solicitation notice.

http://www.wcpspurchasing.org/


http://wcpspurchasing.com/vendors-contractors/becoming-wcps-vendor



301-766-2800

Page 5 of 5

PREVAILING WAGE RATES This construction project is not being bid with Prevailing Wage Rates. OBJECTION TO AWARD Any company objecting to the bid procedure or the recommendation for award has five (5) business days following the date of award by the Board of Education to file a written protest with the Superintendent of Schools. It is the company’s responsibility to ascertain and confirm the date/time of the pertinent Board Meeting. The written appeal must be submitted on company letterhead, dated and signed by the senior officer in the company. The protest letter must include a request for review and ruling by WCPS, a detailed statement of the legal and factual grounds for the protest, including the resulting prejudice to the company, copies of relevant documents, and a statement of the form of relief being requested. Failure to comply with these instructions may result in the protest being deemed “not filed.” Bid protests received later than five (5) days after the Board Meeting will result in the protest being deemed “not timely.” WCPS will not respond or address bid protests that do not conform to these instructions. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Bid Security Bond in the amount of 5% of the Total Bid is required from all Bidders. The Bid Security Bond serves as security for obtaining Performance Bond and Payment Bonds in 100% of the Contract amount from the successful bidder within ten (10) days from Notice of Award of the Contract. Bidder must use the AIA bond form versions provided herein. Only AIA forms that have been reviewed for acceptance by WCPS legal counsel will be acceptable. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work, and prospective Bidders may be required to furnish evidence of performance of similar projects of similar magnitude and complexity and all such information and data as requested. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligation of the Contract and to complete the Work contemplated therein. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive irregularities in the bids, select alternates in any order and to make the award in the manner that the WCBOE determines will best serve the interests of WCPS.

By order of: Washington County Public Schools

Lisa C. Freeman, Supervisor of Purchasing

SECTION 00 20 00

STANDARD FORM OF PROPOSAL

NORTH HAGERSTOWN HIGH SCHOOL – HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION WASHINGTON COUNTY, MARYLAND

Bid 2015-38 00 20 00 - 1 BID FORM

WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS Hagerstown, Maryland


HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION

at

1200 Pennsylvania Avenue Hagerstown, Maryland 21742

Bid Opening - Time: 2:00 PM Local Time Thursday, April 9, 2015

FORM OF PROPOSAL – BID NO. 2015 -38

Proposal of _____________________________________________________________________ (Corporation, a partnership, or an individual hereinafter called “Bidder”) organized and doing business and existing under the laws of the state of ________________________________. I/We as the Bidder, in compliance with the Invitation to Bid for the selected contract package included herein for the Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School, have examined the Bidding Documents, and have become familiar with all the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment necessary to properly complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and Addenda, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the Work required under the Contract Documents, of which this Proposal is a part. All prices include all applicable sales and/or use taxes; include all insurance premiums required and include all premiums for a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price. A five percent (5%) Bid Bond shall be attached to the Proposal. The Bid Bond amount shall be computed on the Lump Sum Total Price inclusive of Alternate Values; shall be submitted with the Washington County Board of Education as the sole obligee, and shall be issued for a minimum period of sixty (60) calendar days from the receipt of Bids. PREQUALIFICATION To become prequalified to bid this project, visit our website: http://wcpspurchasing.com/vendors-contractors/becoming-wcps-vendor. The application to participate as a prime bidder in a construction or related project is a two-step process and both steps of the process must be successfully completed in order to submit a bid. Bids received from contractors who have not been pre-qualified by the Purchasing Officer at least seven days prior to the bid opening will be refused or returned unopened to the sender. COMPLETION TIME – SCHEDULE OF WORK I/We as the Bidder, agree to begin to perform the Work at the time stated in the “Notice to Award/Proceed” and to substantially complete the entire work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. If this work is not completed within the time period specified, I/we will be liable for Liquidated Damages of $1,000.00 per calendar day.




Bid 2015-38 00 20 00 - 2 BID FORM

BASE BID Bidders furnish all labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to properly complete the Work required for the Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School in strict accordance with the Contract Documents for the following lump sum total: Lump Sum Total: DOLLARS $ (Amount in words) (Amount in numbers) This bid and construction project is not subject to Prevailing Wage Rates. SUBCONTRACTORS HVAC Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor: Control Systems, Inc. (CSI) is the sole source installer of the automatic temperature controls for WCPS. Reference Specification Section “23 09 00 – Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for more information. ADDENDA The following Addenda have been received and reviewed and all Work therein is incorporated in the Bid Form of Proposal: (If none please write “NONE”): Addendum No. Date _____________________________ _________________________ _____________________________ _________________________ _____________________________ _________________________ ATTACHMENTS The following items are mandatory and are to be included with the Bid Form of Proposal and shall be completed by the Bidder:

1. WCPS Bid/Proposal Affidavit 2. Bid Security – See Section 00 43 13 – AIA Document A310 -2010 Bid Bond


Bid 2015-38 00 20 00 - 3 BID FORM

REPRESENTATIONS I/We as the Bidder, have reviewed the complete AIA Document A701 – 1997 “Instructions to Bidders,” as modified by the Washington County Board of Education, and agree with the terms and conditions specified therein and submit this Bid Proposal in accordance. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in the bids and in the bidding process and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s own best interests. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security, or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular, is subject to rejection. No Bidder shall withdraw, modify, or cancel his bid, or any part thereof, for a minimum of sixty (60) calendar days after the receipt of bids. The undersigned shall complete the total Work within the timeframe previously stated once the Owner indicates acceptance of this Bid Proposal by way of a written “Notice of Award” or “Letter of Intent” within this minimum sixty (60) day time period, or any time thereafter before the Bid is withdrawn. I/We certify that this Bid is made without previous understanding, agreement, or connection with any person, firm or corporation submitting a bid for the same items and/or services and is, in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud; that none of this company's officers, directors or its employees have been convicted of bribery, attempted bribery, or conspiracy to bribe under the laws of any state or federal government; and that no member of the Board of Education of Washington County, administrative or supervisory personnel or other employees of Washington County Public Schools have any interest in the bidding company except as follows: (complete if applicable) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________

Respectfully submitted,

By ________________________________________________________ (Company)

________________________________________________ ___________________________

(Signature) (Date)

________________________________________________ ____________________________ (Printed Name) (Title)

________________________________________________ ____________________________

(Business Address) (Phone)

(SEAL) If bid is by Corporation I/we the bidder represent, and agree that it is a precedent to acceptance of this bid, that the bidder has not been a party to any agreement to bid of fixed or uniform price. ________________________________________________________________________________ (Signature of Office & Title) (SEAL)


Bid 2015-38 00 20 00 - 4 BID FORM

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me, a Notary Public in the State of ___________________, County of _____________________ City of _______________________ this ________________ day of ___________________, 2015. Commission Expires: __________________________________________

END OF FORM OF PROPOSAL 00 20 00

NOTICE: The Washington County Board of Education reserves the right to award any, all or none due to budgetary constraints.

SECTION 00 20 50

WCPS BID AFFIDAVIT

WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS August 26, 2011

Bid /Proposal Affidavit Page 1

BID/PROPOSAL AFFIDAVIT

COMAR 21.05.08.07

Bidder shall complete and submit this bid/proposal affidavit to the Supervisor of Purchasing, Washington County Public Schools with the bid or offer.

A. AUTHORITY

I HEREBY AFFIRM THAT:

I (print name) ___________________________ possess the legal authority to make this Affidavit.

B. CERTIFICATION REGARDING COMMERCIAL NONDISCRIMINATION

The undersigned bidder hereby certifies and agrees that the following information is correct: In preparing its bid on this project, the bidder has considered all proposals submitted from qualified, potential subcontractors and supplies, and has not engaged in “discrimination” as defined in §19-103 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland. “Discrimination” means any disadvantage, difference, distinction, or preference in the solicitation, selection, hiring, or commercial treatment of a vendor, subcontractor, or commercial customer on the basis of race, color, religion, ancestry, or national origin, sex, age, marital status, sexual orientation, or on the basis of disability or any otherwise unlawful use of characteristics regarding the vendor’s supplier’s or commercial customer’s employees or owners. “Discrimination” also includes retaliating against any person or other entity for reporting any incident of “discrimination”. Without limiting any other provision of the solicitation on this project, it is understood that, if the certification is false, such false certification constitutes grounds for the State to reject the bid submitted by the bidder on this project, and terminate any contract awarded based on the bid. As part of its bid or proposal, the bidder herewith submits a list of all instances within the past 4 years where there has been a final adjudicated determination in a legal or administrative proceeding in the State of Maryland that the bidder discriminated against subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, or commercial customers, and a description, and a description of the status or resolution of that determination, including any remedial action taken. Bidder agrees to comply in all respects with the State’s Commercial Nondiscrimination Policy as described under Title19 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland.

B-1 Certification Regarding Minority Business Enterprises.

The undersigned bidder hereby certifies and agrees that it has fully complied with the State Minority Business

Enterprise Law, State Finance and Procurement Article, §14-308 (a)(2), Annotated Code of Maryland, which provides

that, except as otherwise provided by law, a contractor may not identify a certified minority business enterprise in a bid or proposal and:



Fail to request, receive, or otherwise obtain authorization from the certified minority business enterprise to identify the certified minority proposal;

Fail to notify the certified minority business enterprise before execution of the contract of its inclusion in the bid or proposal;

Fail to use the certified minority business enterprise in the performance of the contract; or

Pay the certified minority business enterprise solely for the use of its name in the bid or proposal.

Without limiting any other provision of the solicitation on this project, it is understood that if the certification is false, such false certification constitutes grounds for the State to reject the bid submitted by the bidder on this project, and terminate any contract awarded based on the bid.

C. AFFIRMATION REGARDING BRIBERY CONVICTIONS

I FURTHER AFFIRM THAT:

Neither I, nor to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the above business (as is defined in Section 16-101(b) of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland), or any of its officers, directors, partners, controlling stockholders, or any of its employees directly involved in the business's contracting activities including obtaining or performing contracts with public bodies has been convicted of, or has had probation before judgment imposed pursuant to Criminal Procedure Article, §6-220, Annotated Code of Maryland, or has pleaded nolo contendere to a charge of, bribery, attempted bribery, or conspiracy to bribe in violation of Maryland law, or of the law of any other state or federal law, except as follows (indicate the reasons why the affirmation cannot be given and list any conviction, plea, or imposition of probation before judgment with the date, court, official or administrative body, the sentence or disposition, the name(s) of person(s) involved, and their current positions and responsibilities with the business):

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________.

D. AFFIRMATION REGARDING OTHER CONVICTIONS


Neither I, nor to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the above business, or any of its officers, directors, partners, controlling stockholders, or any of its employees directly involved in the business's contracting activities including obtaining or performing contracts with public bodies, has:

(1) Been convicted under state or federal statute of:



(a) A criminal offense incident to obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public or private contract; or

(b) Fraud, embezzlement, theft, forgery, falsification or destruction of records or receiving stolen property;

(2) Been convicted of any criminal violation of a state or federal antitrust statute;

(3) Been convicted under the provisions of Title 18 of the United States Code for violation of the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organization Act, 18 U.S.C. §1961 et seq., or the Mail Fraud Act, 18 U.S.C. §1341 et seq., for acts in connection with the submission of bids or proposals for a public or private contract;

(4) Been convicted of a violation of the State Minority Business Enterprise Law, §14-308 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland;

(5) Been convicted of a violation of §11-205.1 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland;

(6) Been convicted of conspiracy to commit any act or omission that would constitute grounds for conviction or liability under any law or statute described in subsections (1)—(5) above;

(7) Been found civilly liable under a state or federal antitrust statute for acts or omissions in connection with the submission of bids or proposals for a public or private contract; or

(8)Been found in a final adjudicated decision to have violated the Commercial Nondiscrimination Policy under Title 19 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland with regard to a public or private contract; or

(9) Admitted in writing or under oath, during the course of an official investigation or other proceedings, acts or omissions that would constitute grounds for conviction or liability under any law or statute described in §§B and

D (1)- (7) above, except as follows (indicate reasons why the affirmations cannot be given, and list any conviction, plea, or imposition of probation before judgment with the date, court, official or administrative body, the sentence or disposition, the name(s) of the person(s) involved and their current positions and responsibilities with the business, and the status of any debarment):

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________.

E. AFFIRMATION REGARDING DEBARMENT




Neither I, nor to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the above business, or any of its officers, directors, partners, controlling stockholders, or any of its employees directly involved in the business's contracting activities, including obtaining or performing contracts with public bodies, has ever been suspended or debarred (including being issued a limited denial of participation) by any public entity, except as follows (list each debarment or suspension providing the dates of the suspension or debarment, the name of the public entity and the status of the proceedings, the name(s) of the person(s) involved and their current positions and responsibilities with the business, the grounds of the debarment or suspension, and the details of each person's involvement in any activity that formed the grounds of the debarment or suspension).

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________.

F. AFFIRMATION REGARDING DEBARMENT OF RELATED ENTITIES


(1) The business was not established and it does not operate in a manner designed to evade the application of or defeat the purpose of debarment pursuant to Sections 16-101, et seq., of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland; and

(2) The business is not a successor, assignee, subsidiary, or affiliate of a suspended or debarred business, except as follows (you must indicate the reasons why the affirmations cannot be given without qualification):

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________.

G. SUB-CONTRACT AFFIRMATION


Neither I, nor to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the above business, has knowingly entered into a contract with a public body under which a person debarred or suspended under Title 16 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland will provide, directly or indirectly, supplies, services, architectural services, construction related services, leases of real property, or construction.

H. AFFIRMATION REGARDING COLLUSION




Neither I, nor to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the above business has:

(1) Agreed, conspired, connived, or colluded to produce a deceptive show of competition in the compilation of the accompanying bid or offer that is being submitted;

(2) In any manner, directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement of any kind to fix the bid price or price proposal of the bidder or offeror or of any competitor, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the contract for which the accompanying bid or offer is submitted.

I. CERTIFICATION OF TAX PAYMENT


Except as validly contested, the business has paid, or has arranged payment of all taxes due the State of Maryland and has filed all required returns and reports with the Controller of the Treasury, the State Department of Assessments and Taxation, and the Department of Labor, Licensing, and Regulation, as applicable, and will have paid all withholding taxes due the State of Maryland prior to final settlement.

J. CONTINGENT FEES


The business has not employed or retained any person, partnership, corporation, or other entity, other than a bona fide employee, bona fide agent, bona fide salesperson, or commercial selling agency working for the business, to solicit or secure the Contract, and that the business has not paid or agreed to pay any person, partnership, corporation, or other entity, other than a bona fide agent, bona fide salesperson, or commercial selling agency, any fee or any other consideration contingent on the making of the Contract.

K. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

I ACKNOWLEDGE THAT this Affidavit is to be furnished to the Procurement Officer and may be distributed to units of: (1) the State of Maryland; (2) counties or other subdivisions f the State of Maryland ;(3) other states; and (4) the federal government. I further acknowledge that this Affidavit is subject to applicable laws of the United States and the State of Maryland, both criminal and civil, and that nothing in this Affidavit or any contract resulting from the submission of this bid or proposal shall be construed to supersede, amend, modify or waive, on behalf of the State of Maryland, or any unit of the State of Maryland having jurisdiction, the exercise of any statutory right or remedy conferred by the constitution and the laws of Maryland with respect to any misrepresentation made or any violation of the obligations, terms, and covenants undertaken by the above business with respect to (1) this affidavit, (2) the contract, and (3) other Affidavits comprising part of the contract.

I DO SOLEMNLY DECLARE AND AFFIRM UNDER THE PENALTIES OF PERJURY THAT THE CONTENTS OF THIS AFFIDAVIT ARE TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE, INFORMATION, AND BELIEF.



Date:_______________________________________

By:

____________________________________________ (Print name of Authorized Representative and Affiant) ____________________________________________ (Signature of Authorized Representative and Affiant)

SECTION 00 20 60

NO BID REPLY FORM

WASHINGTON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS 10435 Downsville Pike


PURCHASING DEPARTMENT

“NO BID” REPLY FORM Bidder: To assist us in obtaining good competition on our Invitations to Bid, we ask that each firm that has received an invitation, but does not wish to bid, state their reason(s) below. This information will not preclude receipt of future invitations unless you request removal from the Bidders List by so indicating below.

BID#: 2015-38 BID TITLE: Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School Unfortunately, we must offer a “NO BID” at this time because: □ 1. We do not wish to participate in the bid process. □ 2. We do not wish to bid under the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid document. Our objections are: □ 3. We do not feel we can be competitive. □ 4. We cannot submit a bid because of the marketing or franchising policies of the manufacturing company. □ 5. We do not wish to sell to the Washington County Public Schools. Our objections are: □ 6. We do not sell the items/services on which bids are requested. □ 7. Other: FIRM SIGNED □ We wish to remain on the Bidders List □ We wish to be deleted from the Bidders List.

SECTION 00 21 13

AIA DOCUMENT A701-1997

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BY WCBOE

Document A701TM – 1997 Instructions to Bidders

AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®

Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:13:11 on 02/05/2015 under Order No.3528535459_1 which expires on 05/17/2015, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2020110703)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address):

THE OWNER:(Name and address):

Washington County Board of Education 10435 Downsville Pike Hagerstown, MD 21740

THE ARCHITECT:(Name and address):

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 DEFINITIONS

2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

4 BIDDING PROCEDURES

5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

6 POST-BID INFORMATION

7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR



2

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS§ 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract.

§ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 as modified by the Board of Education of Washington County, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract whichmodify or interpret the Bidding Documents, including Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions,

clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed

§ 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.

§ 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

§ 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work.

ARTICLE 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS§ 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: § 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction.

§ 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.

§ 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception.

§ 2.1.5 Generally, neither law nor regulations make allowance for negligent errors either of omission or commissionon the part of the bidders. Each Bidder, by making his Bid, represents that he has read and understands the BiddingDocuments. Failure of the Bidder to thoroughly understand all aspects of the Solicitation before submitting his Bid will not act as an excuse to permit withdrawal of his Bid nor secure relief on plea of error.

§ 2.1.6 Once the Contract is awarded to the successful Bidder, no claims for any extra work will be allowed because of alleged impossibilities in the production of the results specified, or because of inadequate or improper plans or



3

specifications, and whenever a result is required, the successful Bidder shall furnish any and all extras and make any changes needed to produce, to the satisfaction of the Owner, the required results.

§ 2.1.7 The Bidder shall warrant that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to solicit or secure the Contract upon an agreement of understanding for a commission or percentage, brokerage or contingent fee exceptingbona fide employees or bona fide established commercial or selling agencies maintained by the bidder for the purposeof securing business. For breach or violation of the warrantee the Owner shall have the right to annul the Contract

without liability or at its discretion to deduct from the contract price or otherwise recover the full amount of such commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent.

§ 2.1.8 The Bidder, by the submission of this Bid agrees as a supplier of good, materials, equipment, or services covered by this Bid or the Contract that he will not discriminate in the employment in any way against any person or persons because of their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, age, or handicap. The Owner does not discriminate on the basis of race, color, sex, age, national origin, religion, or disability.

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS§ 3.1 COPIES§ 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. Either a CD on which all of the Bidding Documents have been scanned or one (1) hard copy set of Bidding Documents will be issued to each bonafide bidder.

§ 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders.

§ 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

§ 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents.

§ 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS§ 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered.

§ 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them.

§ 3.2.4 Questions shall be in writing and sent to the Owner for interpretation and/or clarification.

§ 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS§ 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

§ 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been receivedby the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the

material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement settingforth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other



4

contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. Where less than three (3) manufacturers or products are listed in the Specifications, or the specification lists "Approved Equal" as an acceptable product, the burden of proof of equivalency rests with the Contractor and evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and approved by Architect with final approval to be determined by the Owner. Criteria includes but is not limited to performance, materials, craftsmanship, quality control, certification procedures or requirements, warranty, installation procedures, etc.. Any proposed substitution, or proposed equal product, must be submitted to the Architect for review, 10 days prior to the bid date. After the receipt of bids and award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect are under no obligation to review or approve requests for substitution or equal products that were not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. The Owner reserves the right to request a substitute at any time in the project.

§ 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

§ 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents.

§ 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose.

§ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid.

ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents.

§ 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium.

§ 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern.

(Paragraph deleted) § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change."

(Paragraph deleted) § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder.

§ 4.1.8 The contractor or subcontractor shall use or supply American steel products in performance of this Contract in accordance with the Annotated Code of Maryland, State Finance and ProcurementArticle 17-301 – 17-306 as implemented in the Code of Maryland Regulations (COMAR) 21.11.02.

§ 4.2 BID SECURITY§ 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract



5

or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The successful Bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the bonds required in Article 7 within ten (10) days after Notice of Award of the Contract shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his Bid.

§ 4.2.1.1 Bid bond shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total Bid and shall be submitted with theWashington County Board of Education as the sole oblige and shall be issued for a period of sixty (60) calendar daysfrom the receipt of Bids.

§ 4.2.2 Surety bond shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

§ 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected.

§ 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS§ 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall beenclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Workfor which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing

envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. Submit the Standard Form of Proposal and required documents in duplicate.

§ 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened.

§ 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.

§ 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered.

§ 4.3.5 All prospective bidders must be currently pre-qualified with the WCPS Purchasing Department to be eligible to participate in the bidding process.

§ 4.3.6 Upon request of the Owner, Bidders should be prepared to provide a list of major subcontractors after submission of bids and within two (2) business days of the request.

§ 4.3.7 Errors in bids: Bidders or their authorized representatives are expected to read and review the bid solicitation documents in order to inform themselves as to the conditions, requirements, and specifications before they submitbids: failure to do so will be at the bidder’s own risk and the bidder cannot secure relief from the plea of error. Generally, neither law nor regulations make allowance for errors either of omission or commission on part of bidders. In case of error in extension of prices in the bid, the unit price shall govern

§ 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID§ 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid.

§ 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.

§ 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.

§ 4.4.4 Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted.



6

§ 4.4.5 No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his Bid, or any part thereof, for sixty (60) days after the receipt ofBids.

ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDSAt the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders.

§ 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection.

§ 5.2.1 The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder toperform the Work, and prospective Bidders may be required to furnish evidence of performance of similar projects ofthis magnitude and complication and all such information and data as requested. The Owner reserves the right to

reject any bid if evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out obligations of the Contract and to complete the Work contemplated therein.

§ 5.2.2 Conditional Bids will not be accepted.

§ 5.2.3 The Owner also reserves the right to reject the bid of any Bidder who has previously failed to perform properly or complete on time, contracts of a similar nature, who is not in position to perform the contract, or who has habituallyand without just cause neglected the payment of bills or otherwise disregarded his obligations to Subcontractors,

material, men, or employees. In determining the lowest responsible Bidder the following elements, in addition to those above mentioned, will be considered, whether the Bidder involved:

1. Maintains a place of business 2. Has adequate plant equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously, 3. Has suitable financial status to meet the obligations incidental to the work4. Has appropriate technical experience.

§ 5.2.4 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents pertaining to such proposed Subcontractors’ respective trades.

§ 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has beensubmitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s own best interests. In the event of tie bids where all factors are equal, award shall be made to the Washington County Bidder, the out-of-County Bidder, the Bidder incorporated in Maryland, and the Bidder not incorporated in the state of Maryland, in that order of preference. If bidders within thesegeographical designations are equal as all factor of consideration the award shall be made by a coin toss.

§ 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted.

ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENTBidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents.

(Paragraphs deleted)



7

§ 6.3 SUBMITTALS§ 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder’s own forces;

.2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents.

§ 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder’s option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited.

§ 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect.

ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS§ 7.1.1 The Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder’s usual sources. Firm issuing bonds must bean A-rated or above bond company (A.M. Best rating) and be on the United States Treasury list and be licensed to do

business in the State of Maryland.

§ 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum.

§ 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder’s usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.4 Bid Bond shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total Bid and shall be submitted with theWashington County Board of Education as the sole oblige and shall be issued for a period of sixty (60) calendar daysfrom the receipt of Bids.

§ 7.1.5 The Contractors Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be supplied in the amount of 100% of the value of the total contracted work and shall be submitted with the Washington County Board of Education as the sole obligee.

§ 7.1.6 The Owner shall require within ten (10) days after Notice of Award of the Contract, the selected bidder to furnish PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND in the amount of not less than (100%) of the total amount of the contract covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment ofall obligations arising there-under in such form and amount as specified in the Specifications. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, obtain bonds from same surety that furnished bid security. The premiums for said bonds shall be paid by the Bidder. Obtaining of bonds by the selected bidder shall be a condition precedent to effectuation of the Contract between the Owner and the selected bidder.

§ 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder



8

shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1.

§ 7.2.2 The bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum.

§ 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract.

§ 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affixthereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power.

ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR The Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, as amended by the Board of Education of Washington County, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is aStipulated Sum.

ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS§ 9.1 OBJECTION OF AWARDAny company objecting to the RFP procedure or the recommendation for award has five (5) business days following the date of award by the Board of Education to file a written protest with the Superintendent of Schools. It is thecompany’s responsibility to ascertain and confirm the date/time of the pertinent Board Meeting. The written appeal must be submitted on company letterhead, dated and signed by the senior officer in the company. The protest letter must include a request for review and ruling by WCPS, a detailed statement of the legal and factual grounds for the protest, including the resulting prejudice to the company, copies of relevant documents, and a statement of the form ofrelief being requested. Failure to comply with these instructions may result in the protest being deemed "not filed." Bid protests received later than five (5) days of the Board Meeting will result in the protest beingdeemed "not timely." The WCPS will not respond or address bid protests that do not conform to theseinstructions.

§ 9.2 EMARYLAND MARKETPLACEAll bidders are strongly encouraged to register on the State of Maryland’s eMaryland Marketplace web portal to facilitate WCPS’ compliance to State law. For registration requirements, visit www.emarylandmarketplace.com to join Maryland’s gateway to bidding opportunities throughout the State. Effective June 1, 2008, public school systems in Maryland are required to publish notices of procurements and procurement awards on eMaryland Marketplace. Awards can only be posted to registered companies.

Additions and Deletions Report forAIA

®

Document A701TM – 1997

This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text.

Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 16:13:11 on 02/05/2015.

Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction ordistribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:13:11 on 02/05/2015 under Order No.3528535459_1 which expires on 05/17/2015, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2020110703)

1

PAGE 1

(Name and location or address)address):

…

(Name, legal status and address)(Name and address):

Washington County Board of Education 10435 Downsville Pike Hagerstown, MD 21740

…

(Name, legal status and address)(Name and address):

…

TABLE OF ARTICLESTABLE OF ARTICLES

PAGE 2

§ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, A201 as modified by the Board of Education of Washington County, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents Documents, including Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed

…

§ 2.1.5 Generally, neither law nor regulations make allowance for negligent errors either of omission or commission on the part of the bidders. Each Bidder, by making his Bid, represents that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents. Failure of the Bidder to thoroughly understand all aspects of the Solicitation before submitting his Bid will not act as an excuse to permit withdrawal of his Bid nor secure relief on plea of error.

§ 2.1.6 Once the Contract is awarded to the successful Bidder, no claims for any extra work will be allowed because of alleged impossibilities in the production of the results specified, or because of inadequate or improper plans or specifications, and whenever a result is required, the successful Bidder shall furnish any and all extras and make any changes needed to produce, to the satisfaction of the Owner, the required results.


2

§ 2.1.7 The Bidder shall warrant that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to solicit or secure the Contract upon an agreement of understanding for a commission or percentage, brokerage or contingent fee excepting bona fide employees or bona fide established commercial or selling agencies maintained by the bidder for the purpose of securing business. For breach or violation of the warrantee the Owner shall have the right to annul the Contract without liability or at its discretion to deduct from the contract price or otherwise recover the full amount of such commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent.

§ 2.1.8 The Bidder, by the submission of this Bid agrees as a supplier of good, materials, equipment, or services covered by this Bid or the Contract that he will not discriminate in the employment in any way against any person or persons because of their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, age, or handicap. The Owner does not discriminate on the basis of race, color, sex, age, national origin, religion, or disability.

PAGE 3

§ 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded.Bid. Either a CD on which all of the Bidding Documents have been scanned or one (1) hard copy set of Bidding Documents will be issued to each bonafide bidder.

…

§ 3.2.4 Questions shall be in writing and sent to the Owner for interpretation and/or clarification.

…

§ 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.Where less than three (3) manufacturers or products are listed in the Specifications, or the specification lists "Approved Equal" as an acceptable product, the burden of proof of equivalency rests with the Contractor and evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and approved by Architect with final approval to be determined by the Owner. Criteria includes but is not limited to performance, materials, craftsmanship, quality control, certification procedures or requirements, warranty, installation procedures, etc.. Any proposed substitution, or proposed equal product, must be submitted to the Architect for review, 10 days prior to the bid date. After the receipt of bids and award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect are under no obligation to review or approve requests for substitution or equal products that were not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. The Owner reserves the right to request a substitute at any time in the project.

PAGE 4

§ 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.

§ 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated


3

by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner.

§ 4.1.8 The contractor or subcontractor shall use or supply American steel products in performance of this Contract in accordance with the Annotated Code of Maryland, State Finance and Procurement Article 17-301 – 17-306 as implemented in the Code of Maryland Regulations (COMAR) 21.11.02.

§ 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. required. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, will furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2.successful Bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the bonds required in Article 7 within ten (10) days after Notice of Award of the Contract shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his Bid.

§ 4.2.1.1 Bid bond shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total Bid and shall be submitted with the Washington County Board of Education as the sole oblige and shall be issued for a period of sixty (60) calendar days from the receipt of Bids.

§ 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it Surety bond shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, Bond and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

PAGE 5

§ 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, security and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. Submit the Standard Form of Proposal and required documents in duplicate.

…

§ 4.3.5 All prospective bidders must be currently pre-qualified with the WCPS Purchasing Department to be eligible to participate in the bidding process.

§ 4.3.6 Upon request of the Owner, Bidders should be prepared to provide a list of major subcontractors after submission of bids and within two (2) business days of the request.

§ 4.3.7 Errors in bids: Bidders or their authorized representatives are expected to read and review the bid solicitation documents in order to inform themselves as to the conditions, requirements, and specifications before they submit bids: failure to do so will be at the bidder’s own risk and the bidder cannot secure relief from the plea of error. Generally, neither law nor regulations make allowance for errors either of omission or commission on part of bidders. In case of error in extension of prices in the bid, the unit price shall govern

…

§ 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted.

§ 4.4.5 No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his Bid, or any part thereof, for sixty (60) days after the receipt of Bids.


4

PAGE 6

§ 5.2.1 The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the Work, and prospective Bidders may be required to furnish evidence of performance of similar projects of this magnitude and complication and all such information and data as requested. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out obligations of the Contract and to complete the Work contemplated therein.

§ 5.2.2 Conditional Bids will not be accepted.

§ 5.2.3 The Owner also reserves the right to reject the bid of any Bidder who has previously failed to perform properly or complete on time, contracts of a similar nature, who is not in position to perform the contract, or who has habitually and without just cause neglected the payment of bills or otherwise disregarded his obligations to Subcontractors, material, men, or employees. In determining the lowest responsible Bidder the following elements, in addition to those above mentioned, will be considered, whether the Bidder involved:

1. Maintains a place of business 2. Has adequate plant equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously, 3. Has suitable financial status to meet the obligations incidental to the work4. Has appropriate technical experience.

§ 5.2.4 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents pertaining to such proposed Subcontractors’ respective trades.

§ 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s own best interests. In the event of tie bids where all factors are equal, award shall be made to the Washington County Bidder, the out-of-County Bidder, the Bidder incorporated in Maryland, and the Bidder not incorporated in the state of Maryland, in that order of preference. If bidders within these geographical designations are equal as all factor of consideration the award shall be made by a coin toss.

§ 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, combination and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted.

…

§ 6.2 OWNER’S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

PAGE 7

§ 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the The Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder’s usual sources. Firm issuing bonds must be an A-rated or above bond company (A.M. Best rating) and be on the United States Treasury list and be licensed to do business in the State of Maryland.

…

§ 7.1.4 Bid Bond shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total Bid and shall be submitted with the Washington County Board of Education as the sole oblige and shall be issued for a period of sixty (60) calendar days


5

from the receipt of Bids.

§ 7.1.5 The Contractors Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be supplied in the amount of 100% of the value of the total contracted work and shall be submitted with the Washington County Board of Education as the sole obligee.

§ 7.1.6 The Owner shall require within ten (10) days after Notice of Award of the Contract, the selected bidder to furnish PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND in the amount of not less than (100%) of the total amount of the contract covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising there-under in such form and amount as specified in the Specifications. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, obtain bonds from same surety that furnished bid security. The premiums for said bonds shall be paid by the Bidder. Obtaining of bonds by the selected bidder shall be a condition precedent to effectuation of the Contract between the Owner and the selected bidder.

PAGE 8

§ 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the The bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum.

…

§ 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power.

…

Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the The Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, as amended by the Board of Education of Washington County, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum.

ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS§ 9.1 OBJECTION OF AWARDAny company objecting to the RFP procedure or the recommendation for award has five (5) business days following the date of award by the Board of Education to file a written protest with the Superintendent of Schools. It is the company’s responsibility to ascertain and confirm the date/time of the pertinent Board Meeting. The written appeal must be submitted on company letterhead, dated and signed by the senior officer in the company. The protest letter must include a request for review and ruling by WCPS, a detailed statement of the legal and factual grounds for the protest, including the resulting prejudice to the company, copies of relevant documents, and a statement of the form of relief being requested. Failure to comply with these instructions may result in the protest being deemed "not filed." Bid protests received later than five (5) days of the Board Meeting will result in the protest beingdeemed "not timely." The WCPS will not respond or address bid protests that do not conform to these instructions.

§ 9.2 EMARYLAND MARKETPLACEAll bidders are strongly encouraged to register on the State of Maryland’s eMaryland Marketplace web portal to facilitate WCPS’ compliance to State law. For registration requirements, visit www.emarylandmarketplace.com to join Maryland’s gateway to bidding opportunities throughout the State. Effective June 1, 2008, public school systems in Maryland are required to publish notices of procurements and procurement awards on eMaryland Marketplace. Awards can only be posted to registered companies.

AIA Document D401™ – 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:13:11 on 02/05/2015 under Order No.3528535459_1 which expires on 05/17/2015, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2020110703)

1

Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ – 2003

I, , hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 16:13:11 on 02/05/2015under Order No. 3528535459_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A701™ – 1997, Instructions to Bidders, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

SECTION 00 43 13


BID BOND

SECTION 00 52 13


CONTRACT AGREEMENT

AIA®

Document A101TM – 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

AIA Document A101™ – 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 07:07:42 on 09/16/2009 under Order No.1000391833_1 which expires on 04/12/2010, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1194028149)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

AIA Document A201™–2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document.

AGREEMENT made as of the «21st» day of «April» in the year «Two Thousand Fifteen» (In words, indicate day, month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: « Board of Education of Washington County»« » «10435 Downsville Pike Hagerstown, MD 21740» and the Contractor: «» «» «» for the following Project: Health Suite Expansion North Hagerstown High School 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue Hagerstown, Maryland 21742 The Architect is: Bushey Feight Morin Architects 473 North Potomac Street Hagerstown, Maryland 21740 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.


2

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) « » § 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. § 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than: «The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than .»

Portion of Work

Substantial Completion Date

Substantial Completion Final Completion

August 12, 2015 September 2, 2015

subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. «Liquidation damages in the amount of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000) per day to apply and shall be assessed against the contractor for delay to Substantial Completion. »


3

ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Dollars and Zero Cents» ($ «»), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: § 4.3 Unit prices, if any: (Identify and state the unit price; state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Price Per Unit ($ 0.00) None

§ 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any: (Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.)

Item Price None

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: « » § 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the «1st » day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the «15th» day of the «following» month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than «Forty-five» («45») days after the Architect receives and approves the Application for Payment. § 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. § 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows:

.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of Five percent» («5.00%»). Amounts for changes in the work shall not be included on an Application for Payment until the Change Order is executed.

.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of Five percent» «5.00%»). Reference the Washington County Public School’s Supplement Conditions to the AIA Document A201-1997, page 14 of 23, paragraph 9.3.2 for the policy concerning payments for stored materials.

.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and


4

.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201–1997.

§ 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances:

.1 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and (Section 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201–1997 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.

.2 If final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable shall be in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201–1997.

§ 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be at the sole discretion of the owner. « » § 5.1.9Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 5.2FINAL PAYMENT § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor per the Washington County Public School’s Supplement Conditions to the AIA Document A201-1997, paragraph 9.10.

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: « » ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–1997. § 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–1997. ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–1997 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. « » « » § 8.2 Deleted § 8.3 The Owner’s representative: « » § 8.4 The Contractor’s representative: (Name, address and other information) » «» «»


5

§ 8.5 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. § 8.6 Other provisions: The following provisions may be fully described in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the associated Supplemental Conditions by Washington County Public Schools. ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in the sections below. § 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A101–2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. § 9.1.2 The General Conditions are AIA Document A201–1997, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction as presented in the Project Manual, as modified by the Board of Education of Washington County. § 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual; dated __________. § 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated ____________ as in Section 9.1.3 and are listed in Exhibit A. § 9.1.5 The Drawings are dated __________ and listed in Exhibit B unless modified by the Addenda listed in Section 9.1.6 below: § 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any:

Number Date

ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 10.1 The Contractor shall provide a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price as set forth in AIA Document A201-1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as amended by the Board of Education of Washington County. § 10.2 The Contractor shall provide insurance with limits as described within Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Contract A201-1997, as amended by the Board of Education of Washington County. § 10.3 Certificate of Insurance: Prior to proceeding with the work, the contractor agrees to provide a Certificate of Insurance with the application coverage as listed in the Specifications: » List the Certificate Holder and Additional Insured as: List the Project as: Board of Education of Washington County Health Suite Expansion 10435 Downsville Pike North Hagerstown High School Hagerstown, MD 21740 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue Hagerstown, Maryland 21742


6

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies, of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

«Clayton M. Wilcox, Ed.D » «Superintendent of Schools»

«» «»

(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)

SECTION 00 52 14

WCPS CONTRACT AFFIDAVIT


Mandatory Contract Addendum Page 1

CONTRACT AFFIDAVIT

MANDATORY CONTRACT ADDENDUM

COMAR 21.07.01.25

Bidder shall complete and submit this contract affidavit to the Legal Department of Washington County Public Schools to attach with the contract form.

A.AUTHORITY

I HEREBY AFFIRM THAT:

I, (print name)___________________________________________possess the legal authority to make this Affidavit.

B. CERTIFICATION OF REGISTRATION OR QUALIFICATION WITH THE STATE DEPARTMENT OF ASSESSMENTS AND TAXATION


The business named above is a (check applicable items):

Corporation- ___domestic ____or foreign

Limited Liability Company- ___domestic ___or foreign

Partnership- ___domestic ___or foreign

Statutory Trust- __domestic ___or foreign

Sole Proprietorship____

and is registered or qualified as required under Maryland Law.

I further affirm that the above business is in good standing both in Maryland and (IF APPLICABLE) in the jurisdiction where it is presently organized, and has filed all of its annual reports, together with filing fees, with the Maryland State Department of Assessments and Taxation. The name and address of its resident agent (IF APPLICABLE) filed with State Department of Assessments and Taxation is:

Name and Department ID

Number: ____________________________Address:_____________________________

and that if it does business under a trade name, it has filed a certificate with the State Department of Assessments and Taxation that correctly identifies that true name and address of the principal or owner as:



Name and Department ID Number:_______________________________

Address:____________________________________________________.

C. FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE AFFIRMATION


I am aware of, and the above business will comply with, the provisions of the State Finance and Procurement Article §13-221, Annotated Code of Maryland, which require that every business that enters into contracts, leases, or other agreements with the State of Maryland or its agencies during a calendar year under which the business is to receive in the aggregate $100,000 or more shall ,within 30 days of the time when the aggregate value of the contracts, leases, or other agreements reaches $100,000, file with the Secretary of State of Maryland certain specified information to include disclosure of beneficial ownership of the business.

D. POLITICAL CONTRIBUTION DISCLOSURE AFFIRMATION

I FUTHER AFFIRM THAT:

I am aware of, and the above business will comply with, Election Law Article §§14-191-14-108, Annotated Code of Maryland, which requires that every person that enters into contracts, leases, or other agreements with the State of Maryland, including its agencies or a political subdivision of the State, during a calendar year in which the person receives in the aggregate $100,000 or more shall file with the State Board of Elections a statement disclosing contributions in excess of $500 made during the reporting period to a candidate for elective office in any primary election.

E. DRUG AND ALCOHOL FREE WORKPLACE

(Applicable to all contracts unless the contract is for a law enforcement agency and the agency head’s designee has determined that application of COMAR 21.11.08 and this certification in connection with the law enforcement agency’s undercover operations.)

I CERTIFY THAT:

(1) Terms defined in COMAR 21.11.08 shall have the same meanings when use in this certification.

(2) By submission of its bid or offer, the business, if other than an individual, certifies and agrees that, with respect to its employees to be employed under a contract resulting from this solicitation, the business shall: (a.) Maintain a workplace free of drug and alcohol abuse during the term of the contract; (b.) Publish a statement notifying its employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,

dispensing, possession, or use of drugs, and the abuse of drugs or alcohol is prohibited in the business’ workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violation of the prohibitions;

(c.) Prohibit its employees form working under the influence of drugs or alcohol;



(d.) Not hire or assign to work on the contract anyone who the business knows, or in the exercise of due diligence should know, currently abuses drugs or alcohol and is not actively engaged in a bona fide drug or alcohol abuse assistance or rehabilitation program;

(e.) Promptly inform the appropriate law enforcement agency of every drug-related crime that occurs in its workplace if the business has observed the violation or otherwise has reliable information that a violation has occurred;

(f.) Establish drug and alcohol abuse awareness programs to inform its employees about: (i) The dangers of drug abuse and alcohol abuse in the workplace; (ii) The business’s policy of maintaining a drug and alcohol free workplace; (iii) Any available drug and alcohol counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance

programs; and (iv) (iv) The penalties that may be imposed upon employees who abuse drugs and alcohol in

the workplace; (g.) Provide all employees engaged in the performance of the contract with a copy of the

statement required by §E(2)(b), above;

(h.) Notify its employees in the statement required by §E(2)(b), above, that as a condition of continued employment on the contract, the employee shall:

(i.) Abide by the terms of the statement; and (ii) Notify the employer of any criminal drug or alcohol abuse conviction for an offense occurring in the workplace not later than 5 days after a conviction; (i)Notify the procurement officer within 10 days after receiving notice under §E(2)(h)(ii), above, or otherwise receiving actual notice of a conviction; (j)Within 30 days after receiving notice under §E(2)(h)(ii),above, or otherwise receiving actual notice of a conviction, impose either of the following sanctions or remedial measures on any employee who is convicted of a drug or alcohol abuse offense occurring in the workplace: (i) Take appropriate personnel action against an employee, up to and including termination;

or (ii) Require an employee to satisfactorily participate in a bona fide drug or alcohol abuse

assistance or rehabilitation program; and (k) Make a good faith effort to maintain a drug and alcohol free workplace through implementation of §E(2)(a)-(j),above. (3) If the business is an individual, the individual shall certify and agree as set forth in §E(4), below, that the individual shall not engage in the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of drugs or alcohol in the performance on the contract.

(4) I acknowledge and agree that:

(a.) The award of the contract is conditional upon compliance with COMAR 21.11.08 and this certification;



(b.) The violation of the provisions of COMAR 21.11.08 or this certification shall be cause to suspend payments under, or terminate the contract for default under COMAR 21.07.01.11 or 21.07.03.15, as applicable; and (c.)The violation of the provisions of COMAR 21.11.08 or this certification in connection with the contract may, in the exercise of the discretion of the Board of Public Works, result in suspension and debarment of the business under COMAR 21.08.03.

F. CERTAIN AFFIRMATIONS VALID


To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, each of the affirmations, certifications, or acknowledgments contained in that certain Bid/Proposal Affidavit dated________________________, 20____, and executed by me for the purpose of obtaining the contract to which this Exhibit is attached remains true and correct in all respects as if made as of the date of this Contract Affidavit and as if fully set forth herein.

I DO SOLEMNLY DECLARE AND AFFIRM UNDER THE PENALTIES OF PERJURY THAT THE CONTENTS OF THIS AFFIDAVIT ARE TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE, INFORMATION, AND BELIEF.

Date:_______________________________

By:_____________________________________________ (Printed name of Authorized Representative and Affiant) ________________________________________________ (Signature of Authorized Representative and Affiant)

SECTION 00 61 13.13


PERFORMANCE BOND

SECTION 00 61 13.16


PAYMENT BOND

SECTION 00 62 76

AIA DOCUMENTS G702-1992 AND G703-1992

PAY APPLICATION

AIA

®

Document G702

TM

– 1992

Application and Certificate for Payment

AIA Document G702™ – 1992. Copyright © 1953, 1963, 1965, 1978 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.

Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will

be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:51:20 on 02/13/2009 under Order No.1000347228_1 which expires on 4/13/2009, and is

not for resale.

User Notes:

(304108694)

1

TO O

WNE

R:

Was

hing

ton

Cou

nty

Publ

ic S

choo

ls

82 C

omm

onw

ealth

Ave

nue

Hag

erst

own,

MD

217

40

P

ROJE

CT:

APPL

ICAT

ION

NO: 0

01

Di

strib

utio

n to

:

PE

RIOD

TO:

OW

NER:

ARCH

ITEC

T:

CO

NTRA

CTOR

:

FIEL

D:

OT

HER:

CONT

RACT

FOR

: Gen

eral

Con

struc

tion

FR

OM

CONT

RACT

OR:

VI

A AR

CHIT

ECT:

CO

NTRA

CT D

ATE:

PR

OJEC

T NO

S:

/

/

CONT

RACT

OR'S

APP

LICA

TION

FOR

PAY

MENT

The

unde

rsig

ned

Con

tract

or c

ertif

ies

that

to

the

best

of

the

Con

tract

or's

know

ledg

e, i

nfor

mat

ion

and

belie

f th

e W

ork

cove

red

by th

is A

pplic

atio

n fo

r Pa

ymen

t has

bee

n co

mpl

eted

in a

ccor

danc

e w

ith t

he C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, th

at a

ll am

ount

s ha

ve b

een

paid

by

the

Con

tract

or f

or W

ork

for

whi

ch p

revi

ous

Cer

tific

ates

for P

aym

ent w

ere

issu

ed a

nd p

aym

ents

rece

ived

from

the

Ow

ner,

and

that

cur

rent

pay

men

t sho

wn

here

in is

now

due

.

App

licat

ion

is m

ade

for p

aym

ent,

as sh

own

belo

w, i

n co

nnec

tion

with

the

Con

tract

. C

ontin

uatio

n Sh

eet,

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

3, is

atta

ched

. 1.

ORIG

INAL

CON

TRAC

T SU

M ....

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

.....

$ 0.

00

2. Ne

t cha

nge b

y Cha

nge O

rder

s ....

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

... $

0.

00

CONT

RACT

OR:

3. CO

NTRA

CT S

UM T

O DA

TE (L

ine

1 ±

2) ...

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

....

$ 0.

00

By:

D

ate:

4. TO

TAL

COMP

LETE

D &

STOR

ED T

O DA

TE (C

olum

n G

on

G70

3) ..

......

......

.. $

0.00

St

ate

of:

5.

RETA

INAG

E:

Cou

nty

of:

a.

0 %

of C

ompl

eted

Wor

k

$ 0.

00

Subs

crib

ed a

nd sw

orn

to b

efor

e

me

this

day

of

(Col

umn

D +

E o

n G

703)

b.

0

% o

f Sto

red

Mat

eria

l $

0.00

N

otar

y Pu

blic

:

(Col

umn

F on

G70

3)

To

tal R

etai

nage

(Lin

es 5

a +

5b o

r Tot

al in

Col

umn

I of G

703)

......

......

.....

$ 0.

00

My

Com

mis

sion

exp

ires:

6. TO

TAL

EARN

ED L

ESS

RETA

INAG

E ...

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

....

$ 0.

00

ARCH

ITEC

T'S C

ERTI

FICA

TE F

OR P

AYME

NT

(L

ine

4 Le

ss L

ine

5 To

tal)

In

acc

orda

nce

with

the

Con

tract

Doc

umen

ts, b

ased

on

on-s

ite o

bser

vatio

ns a

nd th

e da

ta c

ompr

isin

g th

is a

pplic

atio

n, th

e A

rchi

tect

cer

tifie

s to

the

Ow

ner t

hat t

o th

e be

st o

f th

e A

rchi

tect

's kn

owle

dge,

in

form

atio

n an

d be

lief

the

Wor

k ha

s pr

ogre

ssed

as

indi

cate

d, t

he q

ualit

y of

the

Wor

k is

in

acco

rdan

ce w

ith t

he C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, an

d th

e C

ontra

ctor

is

entit

led

to p

aym

ent

of t

he

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED.

7. LE

SS P

REVI

OUS

CERT

IFIC

ATES

FOR

PAY

MENT

....

......

......

......

......

......

......

$

0.00

(Lin

e 6

from

prio

r Cer

tific

ate)

8. CU

RREN

T PA

YMEN

T DU

E ...

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

......

$ 0.

00

9. BA

LANC

E TO

FIN

ISH,

INCL

UDIN

G RE

TAIN

AGE

AMOU

NT C

ERTI

FIED

.....

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

$ 0

.00

(L

ine

3 le

ss L

ine

6)

$ 0.

00

(Atta

ch e

xpla

natio

n if

amou

nt c

ertif

ied

diffe

rs fr

om th

e am

ount

app

lied.

Initi

al a

ll fig

ures

on

this

Ap

plic

atio

n an

d on

the

Con

tinua

tion

Shee

t tha

t are

cha

nged

to c

onfo

rm w

ith th

e am

ount

cer

tifie

d.)

CH

AN

GE

OR

DER

SU

MM

AR

Y

AD

DIT

ION

S D

EDU

CTI

ON

S AR

CHIT

ECT:

To

tal c

hang

es a

ppro

ved

in p

revi

ous m

onth

s by

Ow

ner

$ 0.

00 $

0.

00

By:

D

ate:

Tota

l app

rove

d th

is M

onth

$

0.00

$

0.00

Th

is C

ertif

icat

e is

not

neg

otia

ble.

The

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED is

pay

able

onl

y to

the

Con

tract

or

nam

ed h

erei

n. Is

suan

ce, p

aym

ent a

nd a

ccep

tanc

e of

pay

men

t are

with

out p

reju

dice

to a

ny ri

ghts

of

the

Ow

ner o

r Con

tract

or u

nder

this

Con

tract

TOTA

LS

$

0.00

$

0.00

N

ET C

HA

NG

ES b

y C

hang

e O

rder

$

0.00

AIA

®

Document G703

TM

– 1992

Continuation Sheet

AIA Document G703™ – 1992. Copyright © 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967,1970, 1978, 1983 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is

protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal

penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:53:52 on 02/13/2009 under Order No.1000347228_1 which expires on

4/13/2009, and is not for resale.

User Notes:

(4269526369)

1

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

co

ntai

ning

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re st

ated

to th

e ne

ares

t dol

lar.

Use

Col

umn

I on

Con

tract

s whe

re v

aria

ble

reta

inag

e fo

r lin

e ite

ms m

ay a

pply

.

APPL

ICAT

ION

NO: 0

01

APPL

ICAT

ION

DATE

:

PERI

OD T

O:

ARCH

ITEC

T'S P

ROJE

CT N

O:

A

B

C

D

E F

G

H

I

ITEM

N

O.

DES

CR

IPTI

ON

OF

WO

RK

SC

HED

ULE

D

VA

LUE

WO

RK

CO

MPL

ETED

M

ATE

RIA

LS

PRES

ENTL

Y

STO

RED

(NO

T IN

D O

R E

)

TOTA

L C

OM

PLET

ED

AN

D S

TOR

ED

TO D

ATE

(D

+E+F

)

%

(G ÷

C)

BA

LAN

CE

TO

FIN

ISH

(C

- G

)

RET

AIN

AG

E (I

F V

AR

IAB

LE

RA

TE)

FRO

M

PREV

IOU

S A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N

(D +

E)

THIS

PER

IOD

GR

AND

TOTA

L $

0.0

0

$ 0

.00

$

0.0

0

$ 0

.00

$

0.0

0

0.00

%

$ 0

.00

$

0.0

0

SECTION 00 65 16

AIA DOCMENT G704-2000

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

SECTION 00 72 13


GENERAL CONDITIONS (UNEDITED)

SECTION 00 72 14


GENERAL CONDITIONS WCPS SUPPLEMENT

of 24

Supplement to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201 - 1997

Paragraph 1.1.1; ADD the following to the end of the paragraph:

1.1.1 “Written material incorporated within the Agreement shall have precedence, and shall supersede conflicting requirements of the other Contract Documents. However, this provision shall apply only where such written material is explicit and clearly and fully enumerated within the Agreement, all provisions of various Contract Documents shall remain in force; notwithstanding all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral, including the Bidding Documents.”

Paragraph 1.1; ADD the following subparagraph

1.1.8 ADDENDA – Addenda are written or graphic instruction issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modifies or interprets the Bidding Documents, including Drawings, Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed.

Paragraph 1.2.3; ADD the following subparagraphs

1.2.1.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, Contractor and Subcontractor to familiarize himself with the provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.2.1.2 Alleged conflicts or ambiguities shall be brought in writing to the attention of the Architect prior

to Proposal Submission. The Architect shall then issue a written interpretation in the form of an Addendum treating the area in question.

1.2.1.3 Should an alleged conflict or ambiguity be discovered after Proposal submission, it is agreed that

the Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall be deemed to have estimated the work on the provisions and interpretation as may be directed by the Architect. It is understood that this provision shall not require the performance of any work unless such work is covered within the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable there from as being necessary to produce the intended results.

1.2.1.4 If in the language of the Contract Documents it is alleged that certain provisions, words, phrases,

and sentences may be considered unclear, equivocal, conflicting or ambiguous, it is understood and agreed, under the Contract, that they shall be interpreted by the Architect based on complementary provisions of all documents, the context of item in question, and the intent of the Architect.

1.2.1.5 Where any item of work or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular, it shall be deemed to

apply to as many such items or pieces of equipment as required for a complete installation.

1.2.1.6 Words such as include, provide, install, perform, apply, construct, supply erect or similar instructions contained within the Contract Document are comprehensive actions to be performed by Contractor. Unless deliberately stated or otherwise indicated by contrasting wording, the above mentioned words shall include all others listed above.

1.2.1.7 The term “noted” or “as indicated” shall mean as shown, indicated or noted on the Drawings or

in the Specifications or on any other Contract Document.

1.2.1.8 The term “typical” means a representative example to be repeated in all similar situations. However, minor variations where necessary to adapt the typical item to a specific situation shall be included.

of 24

1.2.1.9 Where reference is made to a text, standard, federal specification, manufacturer’s directions, or to other publication, the latest publication published prior to the date of issuance of Contract Documents shall apply, unless identified in Specification by a specific publication date.

1.2.1.10 Locations, sizes, and depth of existing services (i.e. manholes, utilities, etc.) are indicated are

based on records made available by the utility companies and/or the authorities having jurisdiction. Under the work of each applicable section, examine the premises and verify visible, existing conditions prior to proposal submission and the starting of work.

1.2.1.11 Drawing indications of items are generally diagrammatic. Connection and anchorage of

materials, interconnection of equipment and accessories necessary to any system operation not otherwise detailed or specified shall be selected under the work of each section, subject to Architect’s approval, to suit the requirements of the items.

Paragraph 1.2.2; DELETE paragraph 1.2.2, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph

1.2.2 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and paragraphs, and arrangement of Drawings shall in no way be construed to control or limit the manner in which the Contractor performs the work among his Subcontractors, nor shall they relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the work, drawn and/or specified, in its entirety.”

Paragraph 1.2.2; ADD the following subparagraph

1.2.2.1 Wherever in the Specifications there appears a reference to a “Contractor” or to the “Subcontractor” or a reference to a Contractor, installer or supplier of a particular trade, or for a particular type of Work, such reference, regardless of the language thereof, shall be deemed a reference to the Contractor. It shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the duty to perform all of the Work and other obligations provided for under this Contract.

Paragraph 1.2; ADD the following subparagraphs

1.2.4 Computed dimensions shall take precedence over scaled dimensions and large scale drawings over small scale drawings. The drawings are intended to show the general arrangement, design and extent of the Work, and are partly diagrammatic; they are not to be scaled or used in lieu of shop drawings were required.

1.2.5 Should the Drawings disagree in themselves, or with the Specifications, the better quality or

greater quantity of Work or materials shall be used for the purpose of bidding and, unless otherwise ordered in writing shall be provided.

1.2.6 Where typical or representative detail is shown on the drawings, this detail shall constitute the

standard in workmanship and materials throughout corresponding parts of the Work and, when necessary, the Contractor shall be required to adapt such detail for use in said corresponding parts of the Work, said adaptation however, shall be subject to the consent of the Architect.

Paragraph 1.5.2; ADD the following to the end of the paragraph.

1.5.2 “General information of existing conditions is available in the project manual.”

Paragraph 2.1.1; DELETE paragraph 2.1.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph: 2.1.1 The Owner is the Board of Education of Washington County identified as such in the Agreement

and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. Where the word “Architect” occurs in these specifications, it shall be taken to designate either Architect or Engineer.

Paragraph 2.1.2; DELETE paragraph 2.1.2, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

2.1.2 The Contractor understands that the Board of Education of Washington County is a public agency and no mechanics liens are permitted against its property.

Paragraph 2.2.1; DELETE in its entirety.

of 24

Paragraph 2.2.3 DELETE paragraph 2.2.3, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph: 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility

locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site to the extent reasonably required for the execution of the Work and requested by the Contractor in writing within one (1) month of the date of the Contract. The Owner does not warrant or undertake responsibility for the location of utilities or the accuracy of tests concerning the soil, surface, and subsurface conditions.


2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner’s control shall at the Contractor’s written request be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work.


2.2.5 The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and maintaining their own copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as necessary for execution of the Work.


2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, without additional charge, claim, or penalty until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. This right shall be in addition to and not in restriction or derogation of the Owner’s rights under Section 4.3.4.

Paragraph 2.3; ADD the following subparagraph:

2.3.2 If unforeseen conditions occur or are encountered which may substantially impair the quality of the Work unless the Work is suspended, the Owner may suspend the Work by written notice to the Contractor. In the event of such a suspension, Contractor shall be entitled to only adjustments in the Contract Time and an adjustment in the Contract Sum for costs actually incurred at the Project site by reason of such suspension. In any event where the Contractor reasonably determines that a suspension is required in such circumstances the Contractor shall promptly provide written notification to the Owner, and Architect of such determination.


2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Owner, and Architect’s and their respective consultants’ additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

Paragraph 3.2.1; ADD the following as the first sentence of the paragraph:

3.2.1 “The Contractor warrants that it has made itself familiar with the project site, including soils, surface and subsurface conditions and the location of utilities, and the improvements to be constructed.”

of 24

Paragraph 3.3.1; ADD the following subparagraphs: 3.3.1.1 Any construction means, methods, technique, sequence, and procedures specified within the

Contract Documents are to establish minimum standards only. 3.3.1.2 Nothing contained within the Contract Documents shall be construed as limiting the Contractor’s

sole responsibility under this Article. Paragraph 3.3.3; ADD the following subparagraph:

3.3.3.1 All inspections required by law shall be obtained by the Contractor including but not limited to those required by law to be obtained by the Owner and no failure of the Owner to obtain such inspection shall constitute a waiver of Contractor’s obligation hereunder. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of any application for inspection required to be executed by the Owner.


3.4.2 If the specification has listed three (3) or more product lines, substitutions will not be considered. Where less than three (3) manufacturers or products are listed in the Specifications, or the specification lists “Approved Equal” as an acceptable product, the burden of proof of equivalency rests with the Contractor and evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and approved by Architect with final approval to be determined by the Owner. Criteria includes but is not limited to performance, materials, craftsmanship, quality control, certification procedures or requirements, warranty, installation procedures, etc.. Any proposed substitution, or proposed equal product, must be submitted to the Architect for review, 10 days prior to the bid date. After the receipt of bids and award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect are under no obligation to review or approve requests for substitution or equal products that were not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. The Owner reserves the right to request a substitute at any time in the project.


3.4.3 The Contractor shall at all times be in control of the Work and shall be responsible for the safety of his employees, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and their employees.

Paragraph 3.4; ADD the following subparagraphs:

3.4.4 Not later than ten (10) days from the Contract Date, the Contractor shall provide to the Architect, and the Owner a list showing the name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products identified in the Specifications, and, where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor.

3.4.5 The Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the

Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to such proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not available, the Architect may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall not constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Acceptance of a substitute manufacturer must conform to such requirements.

3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Clause 3.4.6 above, the Contractor: (a) represents

that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; (b) represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that specified: (c) certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under his Contract, but excludes additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent: and (d) will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects.

3.4.7 By law, all school sites are drug, alcohol and tobacco free.

3.4.8 Asbestos-Free Products. All products intended for use on this project shall be free of asbestos

material in compliance with the Local, State and Federal laws and regulations.

of 24

3.4.9 Lead-Free-Paint. All paint used on this project shall be lead free. This requirement applies to all

coatings, including materials applied at the place of fabrication or field application. Paragraph 3.5.1; DELETE paragraph 3.5.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work be free from defects, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.


3.5.2 Provisions of these Contract Documents, including specified guarantees, shall not limit the extent or nature of any warranty or guarantee under the law; or limit the extent or nature of other warranty or guarantee provisions either expressed or implied, including warranties of merchantability or fitness for particular use.

3.5.3 Any Contract or Purchase pertaining to this project shall provide the Owner as ultimate user, with

the right to all warranties and guarantees.

3.5.4 No Contract or Purchase pertaining to this project shall allow for waiver of warranties or guarantees.

3.5.5 Except as provided by the technical Specification Sections, each Contractor shall warrant all

materials, workmanship, and equipment against original defects or against injury from proper and usual wear for a period of not less than two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the project or designated portion thereof and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any item which may become defective within the warranty period. Any exceptions or additions to this Paragraph are noted in the technical Specifications Sections. This Paragraph shall in no way limit the Contractor’s obligation to warrant the work as identified in any other provisions of the Contract Documents.

Paragraph 3.6.1; DELETE paragraph 3.6.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph: 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work, or portions thereof,

provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

Paragraph 3.6.1; ADD the following subparagraph:

3.6.1.1 Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the performance of the work. Paragraph 3.7.1; DELETE paragraph 3.7.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit and the Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received. Provisions of this Paragraph shall apply to all items of work both permanent and temporary. The Owner will not reimburse the Contractor for the cost of elective permits which the Contractor chooses to secure in conjunction with his means and methods of executing the work or for any off-site permits. All permit fees not waived by the Governing Authorities will be reimbursed to the Contractor by Washington County Public Schools with no mark up of overhead, profit, or bond to the Contractor. The Owner will be responsible for payment of all utility connection fees.

of 24

Paragraph 3.7.3; DELETE paragraph 3.7.3, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph: 3.7.3 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents to ascertain that the Contract Documents are

to be best of the Contractor’s knowledge in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, of any variance therewith and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.

Paragraph 3.7.4; DELETE paragraph 3.7.4, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph: 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building

codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs.


3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as acceptable to the Owner, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection.

Paragraph 3.8.2, Item 3; DELETE the following sentence:

3.8.2 3. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) Changes in Contract’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.


3.9.2 Within five (5) days following the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a detailed resume of the proposed project manager, superintendent and assistant superintendent for the project. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the qualifications of the proposed persons to perform their duties, and the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject the candidates if the evidence submitted by or investigation of, the Contractor fails to satisfy the Owner that they are qualified to perform the duties.

3.9.3. An experienced project manager must be assigned to this project. His duties generally are to set

schedules, to coordinate with the Architect’s office and the field, to expedite subcontractors, to handle paperwork, to represent the Contractor in meetings and to maintain documentation in a timely manner. Communicating with the Architect and the Owner is an extremely important part of this job. If the project manager does not maintain the prompt performance of his duties, the Owner can direct the replacement and the approval of personnel for the position.

3.9.4 The position of superintendent is to be one of managing the Work on site and not to assist in any

of the physical construction work. His duties are to coordinate, plan, problem solve, and keep the Work on schedule. He shall have an assistant superintendent who is at the work observing the subcontractors, anticipating material needs and to assist the superintendent as required. He also will be in charge and performing any other duties when the superintendent is absent. No work shall be done without one of these personnel there at the Work, including weekends, evenings, and holidays.

3.9.5 If the above personnel do not perform their duties to the Owner’s satisfaction, the Owner may

order him replaced and the Contractor shall comply therewith. No claim will be allowed for actions by the Owner under this provision.

3.9.6 The Contractor shall coordinate and supervise the work of the subcontractors to the end so that the

Work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the work. The Contractors and Subcontractors shall at all times afford each trade, any separate Contractor, or the Owner, every reasonable opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of materials.

of 24

Paragraph 3.10.1; ADD the following subparagraph: 3.10.1.1 The Contractor shall revise and update construction schedule for the Work on a monthly basis, and

submit to Owner and Architect. The Construction Schedule shall give accurate representation to the entire Project, for all completed, current, and planned activities within scope of Project, and include all respective dates.

Paragraph 3.11.1; ADD the following to the end of the paragraph;

3.11.1 This shall be completed prior to final payment and shall be executed by the Contractor certifying that they have been kept in accordance with the provisions of this subparagraph and accurately reflect the construction of the Work as built. In addition to one copy of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Modifications, the Contractor shall maintain one additional set of Contract Documents to be used solely as a record for the future preparation of “As-Built” Drawings. The Contractor shall record all changes and departures from the Contract Documents (floor plans, site plans, ceiling plans, etc.) and the correct locations of concealed work, recording them in red ink on the Documents maintained for this purpose. Recording shall be made immediately after each item of work is completed. At the completion of the Project and before a final payment is made, the Contractor shall deliver these documents to the Architect.


3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment or systems for some portion of the work.


3.12.11 Submittal review times listed in the Contract Documents are the minimum review time per submission. The Architect is not obligated to approve submittals on the first submission or any subsequent submission if the submittals are incomplete or require revision. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule submittals well in advance of order and delivery times, allowing a reasonable variance in review time and the possibility of revisions and resubmission.


3.13.2 The Contractor shall assume responsibility for all of its construction activities on the site. All employees, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and material suppliers of the Contractor shall be bound by the directions of the Contractor pertaining to disposition of materials and equipment on the site and precautions necessary for protection of life and property. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall maintain continuous access to the work for use by all contractors, employees, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and material suppliers.


3.14.3 No contractor shall cut structural members except with written permission of the Owner and Architect.


3.15.1 The Contractor shall, on a daily basis, police and keep clean the site and surrounding areas of the project of his materials, rubbish, tools, construction equipment, machinery, or any materials to be stored thereon, either temporarily or permanently.


3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify, protect, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work caused in whole or in part by acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim damage, loss or expense is

of 24

caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.


3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this section 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, their consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving of, or the failure to give, direction or instructions by the architect, their consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage and provided that the giving of such instructions is usual and customary as otherwise herein defined.

3.18.4 The Contractor agrees to perform the Work in a safe and proper manner and comply with all laws

and Ordinances referring to such Work, and to indemnify and save the Owner, his respective agents, consultants, servants, and employees(hereinafter the “Indemnities). Such indemnity, as used in this Article, includes the defense of claims, made against the Indemnities and all penalties for violation of the same.

3.18.5 The purchase of insurance by the Contractor shall in no event be construed as a fulfillment or

discharge of the obligations set forth in this section.

3.18.6 To the fullest extent permitted by Law, the Contractor shall properly guard its Work and areas affected from being injured by it or by the condition of the Project Site, and shall in all respects comply with any and all provisions of the law and local ordinances relating to the maintenance of danger signals, barriers, lights, and similar safeguards respecting falling materials and in and about all excavations, protruding nails, hoists, openings, scaffolding, stairways and other parts of the work and adjacent area where the same are required. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend and save harmless the Indemnities against loss and expense by reason of liability imposed by law upon the Indemnities for damages because of bodily injuries including death at any time resulting therefrom , sustained by any person or persons other than employees of the Contractor, whether or not the Indemnities are negligent in such event.

3.18.7 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall agree to indemnify, defend and save

harmless the Indemnities against loss and expense by reason of the liability imposed by law upon the Indemnities for damages because of bodily injuries, including death at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by any employee of the Contractor while at the site where Work under this Contract is conducted, or elsewhere, while engaged in the performance of Work under this contract. The Contractor will not indemnify the Indemnities’ sole or concurrent negligence, whether attributable to a breach of statutory duty, or administration regulation, or otherwise.

3.18.8 The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the Indemnities harmless by reason of any liens,

claims, demands or other liabilities, which may be asserted against the Indemnities by any other independent Contractor on the Project, and which arise out of any act or omission of the Contractor.

3.18.9 In the event of any such liability, loss, expense, damage or injury, or if any claim or demand for

damage is made against the Indemnities, the Owner may withhold from any payment due or thereafter to become due to the Contractor under the terms of this Contract, an amount sufficient in its judgment to protect and indemnify Indemnities for any and all such claims ,liability expense, loss, damage or injury; or the Owner, in its sole decision may require the Contractor to furnish a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, guaranteeing such protection, which bond shall be furnished by the Contractor within five (5) days after written demand had been made thereafter.

3.18.10 The indemnification obligation of the Contractor under this Article 3 shall not be limited in any

way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefit payable by or

of 24

for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under Workman’s Compensation Acts, Disability Benefits Acts or other employee benefits Acts.

3.18.11 The Owner will obtain and pay for, if necessary, the general building permit, post applicable

utility bonds and pay access fees and right of way fees. The Contractor will arrange and pay for the cost of all other “trade” permits, approvals and inspections. The Contractor will be responsible for notifying all agencies to schedule inspections or approvals, whether permits or fees are in the Contractor’s or the Owner’s responsibility.

3.18.12 Contractor shall not place any signs, billboards or poster on any portion of the project site,

building property or fences (temporary or permanent) surrounding the same, unless prior written permission has been received from the Owner, and then only of a size, material, color and type and a location approved by the Owner.

3.18.13 The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing safety programs for his own forces in

accordance with Federal, State, and local requirements. In addition to other indemnities contained herein the Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless against any and all damages, claims and losses, the Owner, and/or Architect from any and all damages, claims and losses made as a result of Contractor’s failure to abide by this provision, the Contract and for any and all safety and health (including but not limited to OSHA, MOSH, and VOSH) claims or violations that are alleged or brought. Said indemnification shall include but not be limited to Owner’s, and/or Architect’s attorney’s fees and costs.

Paragraph 4.2.12; DELETE the following:

4.2.12 When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.


4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents and acceptable to the Owner.


4.3.1 Written notice shall be on Contractor’s stationary; meeting minutes and facsimile transmission will not be considered written notice.

Paragraph 4.3.2; ADD the following to the beginning of the first sentence: 4.3.2 Except as indicated in 4.3.7, Paragraph 4.3.3; DELETE paragraph 4.3.3, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents except the Owner may withhold payment to an extent reasonably necessary to secure or compensate for a claim.

Paragraph 4.3.7.1; DELETE paragraph 4.3.7.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice shall be made in writing to the Owner and Architect not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay, otherwise shall be waived. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary.

of 24

Paragraph 4.3.7.; ADD the following paragraph: 4.3.7.3 It has been determined that the following table will be used to determine allowable non-

compensable time extensions to the contract for “unusually severe weather” at the construction site based on a five (5) day work week.

Month No. of work day delays that may be expected to occur under normal weather conditions. January 7 February 7 March 5 April 4 May 3 June 3 July 3 August 3 September 3 October 4 November 4 December 4

Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the contractor’s scheduled work day. The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of days anticipated as listed above, the Contractor shall be entitled to additional Contract time.

Paragraph 4.5; DELETE in its entirety Paragraph 4.6; DELETE in its entirety Paragraph 5.2.1; REVISE the first sentence in paragraph 5.2.1 to read as follows:

5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, but no later than 48 hours after requested by the Owner, shall furnish in writing to the Owner the names of persons or entities…


5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected without approval of Owner.


5.2.5 If the Contractor fails to submit names of persons or entities to whom the Owner and Architect has no reasonable objection within a reasonable amount of time, the Contract may be terminated by the Owner.

5.2.6 The Contractor shall not be entitled to progress payments prior to approval of the persons or

entities as provided in Subparagraph 5.2.1. Paragraph 5.3.1; REVISE the first sentence as follows: 5.3.1 “By appropriate agreement” to “By an appropriate written agreement”

of 24

Paragraph 5.4.1; DELETE Item No. 1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW Item No. 1: 5.4.1 1. assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant

to Section 14.2 or stoppage of the Work pursuant to Subparagraph 2.3 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and

Paragraph 5.4.2; DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 6.1.4; DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 6.2.4; DELETE paragraph 6.2.4, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage caused by the Contractor to completed construction or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or other Contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.

ADD the following subparagraphs:

6.2.6 Should the Contractor be caused damage by another Contractor, no action will lie against the Owner and the Owner shall have no liabilities therefore, but the Contractor may assert his claim for damages against such other Contractor as the third party beneficiary under the Contract between such other Contractor and the Owner. Should such other Contractor make a claim against the Owner or Architect on account of damages alleged to have been so sustained, such the Contractor agrees that he will hold the Owner or Architect harmless against any such claim or suit and the he will reimburse to the Owner or Architect as the case maybe, the cost of defending such suit, including reasonable attorney’s fees, and if any judgment against the Owner or Architect arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall pay all costs incurred by the Owner or Architect.

6.2.7 Upon entering the project, locate all general reference points provided, and take such action as

necessary to prevent their destruction.

6.2.8 Under the work of each Contractor, subcontractor, and all personnel, layout work and be responsible for all lines, levels, elevations, and measurements from points provided. Exercise proper precautions to verify conditions indicated in the Contract Documents and be responsible for any error resulting from failure to exercise such precaution.


7.1.2 A Change Order shall not release the Contractor of obligations under the contract and be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor.


7.1.4 Except in any emergency which might endanger life or property, no extra work or charge shall be made unless a written change order from the Owner and/or Architect has been received by the Contractor.

Paragraph 7.3.2; DELETE paragraph 7.3.2, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph s:

7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order or in the event that full execution of a Change Order may cause undo delay to the work.

of 24

Paragraph 7.3.5; ADD the following to the end of the paragraph: 7.3.5 Failure of the Contractor to advise the Architect of any disagreement with the Construction

Change Directive within a reasonable period, and prior to the commencement of the change in the work involved, will constitute the Contractor’s agreement to the terms provided in the Construction Change Directive.

Paragraph 7.3.6, DELETE paragraph 7.3.6, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

“If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set forth in Paragraph 7.3.6 below. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: All Change Orders shall be subject to the following format for itemization of the costs:

1. Attach an itemization of labor hours. A certified payroll affidavit may be required to substantiate labor rates. The cost of foreman and superintendents may be added only when the change order makes necessary the hiring of additional supervisory personnel or makes their employment for time in addition to that required by the basic contract, or if the foreman or superintendent participates in the actual work of the Change Order.

2. Labor burden percentage costs shall include all fringes, taxes, insurance, liabilities, workmen’s compensation and unemployment. Labor burden percentage rates are subject to approval of the Owner and are not subject to profit and overhead.

3. Attach an itemization of all materials used listing unit prices and extended prices. 4. Attach an itemization of equipment used and rental rates. If equipment is a rental, attach copy of

rental invoice. Rental equipment and contractor-owner equipment costs shall include all costs associated with the equipment, i.e. transportation, set-up, gas and oil. Rental rates shall not exceed rates established by local rental companies and “MEANS DATA” rates.

5. Profit and overhead shall be considered full reimbursement for any additional expenses caused by the change order work. The Contractor shall agree to profit and overhead markup on work by his own forces as outlined in paragraph 10 below. These allowances for overhead and profit include among other costs; maintenance and/or operations of Contractor’s regular established office, branch office, and other facilities; resident and / or non-actively engaged supervision; time keepers; clerks; stenographers; watchmen; cost of correspondence; increased item of warranty under the change.

6. The cost of the bond is not included in allowable markups. 7. A Change Order request shall not be considered unless submitted with all required and requested

supporting documentation. All parties to the change shall use the Change Order Format. 8. For all work to be performed by Subcontractor/Subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish the

Subcontractors’ itemized proposal which shall contain original signatures by an authorized representative of the Subcontracting firm. If requested by the Owner or Architect, proposals from suppliers or other supporting data to substantiate the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s cost shall be furnished.

9. Change Order costs shall not exceed unit pricing as provided in the Contract Documents. 10. Unless otherwise specified, the allowable markup for combined overhead and profit, for work

performed by the Contractor with his own forces will be based on the monetary value of the work in accordance with the following schedule:

Value of work Combined Overhead and Profit $0 - $1,000 15% $1,001 - $5,000 10% $5,001 - $10,000 7% $10,001 - $25,000 5% Over $25,000 negotiated, but not more than 5%

of 24

11. For extra work performed by a Subcontractor with his own organization, the percentages for combined overhead and profit will be as outlined above. On the work partly or solely performed by a Subcontractor, the Contractor will be allowed five percent (5%) of total costs of the Subcontractor’s labor, materials, overhead and profit only. Only one markup for combined overhead and profit by a Subcontractor will be permitted.

12. The Contractor shall submit all Change Orders on Washington County Public Schools Change Order Request Form attached in Contract Documents.”

Paragraph 7.3.8; DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 7.4.1; DELETE paragraph 7.4.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

7.4.1 The Architect with concurrence of the Owner will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the purposes of the building and the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.


8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed. If there is no Notice to Proceed it shall be such other date as may be established in the Owner-Contractor Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible.


8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8 or when the required certificate of use or occupancy has been received by the Owner, whichever is later.

Paragraph 8.2.2; DELETE the following:

8.2.2 “to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic’s liens and other security interests.” Paragraph 8.2; ADD the following Subparagraph:

8.2.4 Should the progress of the Work be delayed by any fault, neglect, act, or omission of the Contractor or any person or firm employed by him or should it be necessary to complete the work within the time permitted for the Contractor’s work, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, work such overtime as may be necessary to make up for all lost time and to avoid delay in completion of the Work. The Contractor shall compensate the Owner for and hold him harmless against any and all cost, expense, losses, liability, and damages which the Owner may sustain or incur by reason of such delay.


8.3.1 Requests for extension of completion time due to conditions over which the Contractor has no control or its subcontractors and suppliers have no control will be reviewed by the Owner after written application is made to the Owner and Architect for a time extension, with reasons stated clearly, and detailed proof given for all delays beyond the Contractor’s or its subcontractors and suppliers control. No time extension will be allowed except by written and specific approval of the Owner. Delays beyond the Contractor’s or its subcontractors and suppliers control may include: an act or neglect of the Owner’s own forces, Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in delivers, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s or its subcontractors and suppliers control or by other causes which the Owner and Architect determine may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order. Extension of time shall be Contractor’s sole remedy for delays unless the same shall have been caused by acts constituting intentional interference by the Owner with Contractor’s performance

of 24

of the work where and to the extent such acts continue after Contractor’s notice to Owner of such interference. Owner’s exercise of any of its rights under Article 7, Changes in the work, or subparagraph 3.13.3, regardless of the extent or number of such changes, or Owner’s exercise of any of its remedies of suspension of the work, or requirement of correction or re-execution of any defective work, shall not under any circumstances, constitute intentional interference with Contractor’s performance of the work. No claim for extension of time shall be made or entertained on the basis of rejection of work in place, shop drawings, or samples or for non conformance with the Contract Documents.“

Paragraph 9.3.2, DELETE paragraph 9.3.2, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

9.3.2 Unless previously approved by Owner, payments shall not be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Similarly, unless previously approved by the Owner, payments shall not be made for materials and/or equipment stored off the site. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.”

Paragraph 9.3.3; ADD the following:

9.3.3 Nothing contained herein diminishes the responsibility of the Contractor to replace stolen, defective, or vandalized work, materials or equipment.


9.4.3 Retainage in the amount of ten (10%) percent shall be withheld with each application for payment until Substantial Completion. If the Contractor has shown earnest progress and prompt payment of subcontractors during the first half of the construction billing period, he may in writing to the Owner/Architect request that no further retainage be withheld. The Owner/Architect will review the request and respond in writing within 14 calendar days of the receipt of the request of their decision.

9.4.4 In any event where the Architect, with cause, does not certify payment or withholds certification

to any extent, the Contractor shall nonetheless continue to fully perform the work. Paragraph 9.5.1; ADD the following item:

9.5.1 .8 mechanic’s lien notice or action filed, or reasonable evidence indicating probable filling of each notice or action.


9.6.1 Progress payments shall not be due until the following conditions have been achieved: (A) The Contractor has submitted a sworn Application for Payment in an Owner’s approved format showing all money paid out and costs incurred to the date of Application for Payment: (B) The Contractor has submitted unconditional lien waiver on a form acceptable to the Owner, establishing the total amount of payments to date and conditional lien waivers for the amount of payments to date and conditional lien waivers for the amount of the current request for all Subcontractors and Supplies.

Paragraph 9.7.1; DELETE paragraph 9.7.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph s:

9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect, then the Contractor may, upon fifteen (15) additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-down, delay, and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.”

of 24

Paragraph 9.8.1; ADD the following to the end of the paragraph: 9.8.1 Substantial Completion shall include receipt and all warranties and approval of all O&M Manuals,

demonstrations and training as required by the Contract Documents. Paragraph 9.8; ADD the following subparagraph:

9.8.6 When the Architect and Owner agree that the project has reached “Substantial Completion” as set forth in paragraph 8.1.3, is on schedule, and it appears that there are no complications, problems in completing the job, the retainage may be reduced to five percent (5%) at the Owner’s discretion.

Paragraph 9.9.1; DELETE paragraph 9.9.1, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph: 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any

stage. Paragraph 9.10.2, DELETE paragraph 9.10.2, and replace in lieu thereof the following NEW paragraph:

9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by the Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment with AIA Form and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner and Release of Liens on the “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens and Payments of Debts and Claims” AIA Form: (6) all records, drawings and specifications, addenda, change orders, and other modifications maintained at the site under the subparagraph 3.11.1 all warranties, instruction and maintenance manuals required. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. Final payment to the Contractor shall not become due until all close-out documents have been properly submitted to and certified by the Architect, and delivered by the Architect to the Owner.

Paragraph 9.10.4; ADD the following item: 9.10.4 .4 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial Completion. Paragraph 9.10; ADD the following Subparagraph:

9.10.6 Final payment constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor not later than sixty (60) days after the work has been completed and accepted by the Owner, and the Architect, in accordance with all other provisions of 9.10.


10.1.1 The Contractor shall solely be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the Contractor’s safety program to the Owner. It is expressly understood and agreed that the Owner, the Architect, and his Project Representative are not in charge of the Work or in control thereof. Any provisions in the Contract Documents in conflict with this Article shall be null and void.

of 24

Paragraph 10.2.6; ADD the following: 10.2.6 This person, or approved alternate person, shall be on site at all times while personnel for whom

they are responsible are on site. This person will be fully responsible for implementing and enforcing a program amongst his company’s employees, that ensures their safety and the safety of others affected by their work, and that is in full compliance with governing agencies including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration.


10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety or the safety of persons or property and the Contractor shall protect adjoining properties, streets, walkways, sidewalks, and paths so as to protect the safety of persons or property using such adjoining properties, walkways, sidewalks and paths.


10.2.8 The Contractor shall maintain an updated materials data sheet for materials being used by Contractor of the Work. A copy of the list must be kept on site by the Contractor in a readily accessible area. Under no circumstances will the storage of hazardous materials unnecessary for completion of the Work to be allowed on site. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to promptly remove all stored hazardous materials from the site upon completion of the Work for which it is intended.

10.2.9 The Contractor shall protect excavations and structures from damage by rain, water, ground water,

or water from any other source.

10.2.10 The Contractor shall provide constant protection to maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury and damage by rain, snow, wind, storms, frost, or heat and normal constructions operations and shall protect work as necessary or at the end of each day’s work.

10.2.11 The Contractor shall remove work damaged due to failure to provide specified protection and

replace the work at no additional cost to the Owner. Paragraph 10.3; ADD the following subparagraph:

10.3.1.1 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with final determination by the Architect.

Paragraph 10.3.3; ADD the following:

10.3.3 Failure of Contractor to stop work upon encountering asbestos or PCB per Subparagraph 10.3.1 shall relieve the Owner of responsibility for any losses by the Contractor attributable to these materials.


10.6.1 In any case of an emergency, the Contractor shall immediately respond in accordance with the Contractor’s safety plan and notify the Architect and Owner by the most expeditious means available, written notice explaining the situation and actions taken.


10.6.2 Additional compensation or extension of time will not be considered or permitted for emergencies arising from delay, damage, or loss as stipulated in 8.2.4 and 10.2.5 or other applicable provisions.

of 24

Paragraph 11.1; REVISE the paragraphs as follows: 11.1.1 General Insurance Requirements 11.1.1.1 The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to maintain during the term of the Contract

commercial general liability insurance, business auto liability insurance, workers compensation insurance, employers liability insurance, and umbrella excess liability insurance to the same extent required of the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish Subcontractors’ certificates of insurance to the Owner immediately upon request.

11.1.1.2 All insurance policies required hereunder shall be endorsed to provide that policy is not

subject to cancellation, non-renewal or material reduction coverage until sixty (60) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner.

11.1.1.3 All required insurance coverages must be underwritten by insurers allowed to do business in the State of Maryland and acceptable to the Owner. The insurers must also have a policy holders’ rating of “A-“ or better, and a financial size of “Class VII” or better in the latest evaluation by A.M. Best Company, unless Owner grants specific approval for an exception.

11.1.2 Insurance Limits 11.1.2.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the following insurance coverages on an

“occurrence” basis which shall be written for not less than the limits specified below or required by law, whichever is greater.

11.1.2.1.1 Commercial general liability insurance or its equivalent for bodily injury, personal injury and

property damage including loss of use, with minimum limits of: $1,000,000 each occurrence; $1,000,000 personal and advertising injury; $2,000,000 general aggregate; and $2,000,000 projects/completed operations aggregate

This insurance shall include coverage for all of the following: i. General aggregate limit applying on a per project basis; ii. Liability arising from premises and operations; iii. Liability arising from actions of independent contractors; iv. Liability arising from products and completed operations with such coverage to be

maintained for two years after completion of Work; v. Contractual liability including protection for contractor from bodily injury and

property damage claims arising out of liability assumed under this Contract; and vi. Liability arising from the explosion, collapse, or underground (XCU) hazards.

11.1.2.1.2 Business auto liability insurance or its equivalent with a minimum limit of $1,000,000 per

accident and including coverage for all of the following: i. Liability arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of any auto (or hired and non-

owned autos only if no owned autos); and ii. Auto contractual liability.

11.1.2.1.3 Workers compensation insurance or its equivalent with statutory benefits as required by any

state or Federal law, including standard “other states” coverage; employers liability insurance or its equivalent with minimum limits of:

$100,000 each accident for bodily injury by accident; $100,000 each employee for bodily injury by disease; and $500,000 policy limit for bodily injury by disease.

of 24

11.1.2.1.4 Umbrella excess liability or excess liability insurance or its equivalent with minimum limits of:

$5,000,000 per occurrence; $5,000,000 aggregate for other than products/completed operations and auto liability; and $5,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate

And including all of the following coverages on the applicable schedule of underlying insurance:

i. Commercial general liability ii. Business auto liability; and iii. Employers’ liability.

11.1.2.1.5 The elected and appointed officials, officers, consultants, agents and employees and authorized volunteers of the Washington County Board of Education shall be named as additional insureds on the Contractor’s commercial general liability insurance and umbrella excess or excess liability insurance policies with respect to liability arising out of the Contractors projects, installation, and/or services provided under this Contract. Such coverage shall extend to cover the additional insured(s) for liability arising out of the following:

i. On-going operations; and ii. Projects and completed operations

The commercial general liability policy and the umbrella excess liability or excess liability policies, if required herein, must include additional insured language, which shall afford liability coverage for the exposures listed above in i. and ii.

11.1.2.1.6 The certificate of insurance must be provided to the Purchasing Department of WCPS, Hagerstown, MD prior to commencement of the Contract.

Paragraph 11.2.1; REVISE the paragraph as follows: 11.2.1 WCPS will not provide Builder’s Risk protection as it does not apply.

Paragraph 11.4.1, REVISE the paragraph as follows:

11.4.1 The Owner will effect and maintain “All Risk” insurance for physical loss or vandalism and malicious mischief perils subject to a deductible of $1,000 per occurrence upon all structures and appurtenances thereto on which the Work of the Contract is to be done to the full insurable value thereof, including materials in place or to be used as part of the permanent construction. Coverage shall protect the Owner, the Contractor and Subcontractor as interests may appear. The Owner does not maintain insurance of any kind on tools, equipment, temporary offices, sheds, shacks, and other property of the Contractor or his employees, no materials or supplies stored on site or away from the job site. It shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor to provide for his own protection and that of his employees against any losses of such tools, equipment, and other property and materials.

Paragraph 11.4.1.2; DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 11.4.2; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

11.4.2 WCPS will not provide boiler and machinery insurance as it does not apply.

of 24

Paragraph 11.4.9; REVISE the paragraph as follows: 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an

insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order.

Paragraph 11.4.10; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power.


11.5.1 Unless waived by the Owner in writing, the Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder and complying with the requirements of Maryland law. Both Bonds shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount and shall name the Owner as Obligee. Firms issuing bonds must be licensed to write bonds in the State of Maryland. The Contractor shall pay premiums for required bonds. Obtaining of bonds by Contractor shall be a condition precedent to effectuation of the Contract between the Owner and Contractor. If additional work is authorized the amounts of the bonds shall be increased to cover the value of the increased Contract sum. All bonds shall confirm to the requirements of the Maryland Little Miller Act.


12.1.1 If any portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of the Architect or to the requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by either, the Architect, Owner, or any other governmental agency be uncovered for their observation and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.


12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect’s, the Owner’s, or any governmental agency’s services and expenses made necessary thereby.

Paragraph 12.2.1; ADD the following subparagraphs:

12.2.1.1 Defective work shall include by not be limited to Work which may be caused by deterioration or failure to perform due to: premature wear (not occasioned by abuse); or inherent defects in materials workmanship of manufacturer, or fabrication; or improper execution of work.

12.2.1.2 Cost of correcting such related work also includes all contingent damages arising therefrom,

including damages to the work (whether installed by the Contractor or another) and to other property of the Owner.

12.2.1.3 Such warranties as provided herein do not deprive the Owner of the Owner’s right to prosecute

any claim for breach of contract. 12.2.1.4 Any defective or nonconforming work during this period, causing hazard to life, safety, property,

or use causing the Owner a financial loss shall be corrected immediately without regard to normal working hours. The Owner will immediately endeavor to make telephone notice to the Contractor on the next working day.

of 24

12.2.1.5 The Owner shall direct, if endeavors to contact the Contractor fail, certain telephone notification to Subcontractors in order to expedite emergency repairs. The Contractor shall not be relieved of this responsibility and shall supervise and direct correction of defects as required by the Contract Documents.

12.2.1.6 The manufacturer of a product may be specifically mentioned as a party to a warranty. Then, in

such cases, it shall be the Contractor’s obligation to produce the required warranty of the manufacturer and submit it to the Architect for examination and approval. Inclusion of a manufacturer as a party to a warranty does not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

12.2.1.7 Warranties on operating systems, equipment, or components placed in operation prior to

Substantial Completion or acceptance shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion. Paragraph 12.2.2.1; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within two years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the two-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the correction by the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.

Paragraph 12.2.2.2; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

12.2.2.2 The two-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work.

Paragraph 12.2.2.3; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

12.2.2.3 The two-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.


12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or other Contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including attorneys’ fees and expenses.


12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the two-year period for the correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contactor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

of 24

Paragraph 12.2; ADD the following subparagraph: 12.2.6 Inspection, failure to inspect, or approval or acceptance of any part of the Work, or any payment

on account thereof, shall not in any way limit the right to reject materials or equipment later found by the Architect, the Owner, or any Governmental Agency to be defective or not in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.


13.3.2 All proposals, approvals, instructions, requests, claims, demands and other notices shall be made in writing on Contractor’s stationary; meeting minutes and facsimile transmission will not be considered written notice.


13.4.2 No consent or waiver, expressed or implied, by either party to this agreement to or of any breach or default by the other in performance of any obligations hereunder shall be deemed or construed to be a consent or waiver to or of any other breach or default by such party hereunder. Failure on the part of any party hereto to complain of any act or failure to act of the other party or to declare the other party in default hereunder, irrespective of how long such failure continues, shall not constitute a waiver of the rights of such party hereunder. Inspection by, payment by, or tentative approval or acceptance by the Owner or the failure by Owner to perform any inspection hereunder, shall not constitute final acceptance of the work or any part thereof, and shall not release Contractor from any of its obligations hereunder.

Paragraph 13.4: ADD the following subparagraph:

13.4.3 The Contractor is subject to liquidated damages in the amount set forth on the bid form specification for delay of the date established in the Contract Documents for substantial completion, when such delay has been determined to be caused by the Contractor.


13.5.1 Where Specifications or IBC Code requires testing by an independent testing laboratory, the Owner will retain and pay for the services of a testing laboratory under a separate contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the scheduling of all tests with the testing laboratory. Reports will be delivered to the Owner, Architect, and the Contractor simultaneously.

1. Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work not listed in the Contract Documents by required by the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders or public authorities or municipalities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time.

2. The contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with the Owner’s independent testing laboratory or with the appropriate public authority.

3. The Contractor shall give the Owner and Architect\Engineer timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect\Engineer may observe such procedures.

Paragraph 13.5: ADD the following subparagraph:

13.5.7 If required, subsequent to completion of construction, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a signed certification indicating that to the best of his knowledge and belief, Work was performed in accordance with the approved Construction Documents.


13.6.1 No interest shall be paid by the Owner to Contractor under the Contract Documents.

Paragraph 13.7.1; REVISE the paragraph as follows: 13.7.1 Contractor recognizes and agrees that Owner is a Governmental Agency and that the statute of

limitations is not applicable to the Owner.

of 24

Paragraph 14.1.1; DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 14.1.3; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in section 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work Executed to date.

Paragraph 14.1.4; DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 14.2.1; REVISE the paragraph as follows:

14.2.1 If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of insolvency, or if he fails to make prompt payment for materials, supplies, labor, or other items purchased or used in connection with the work or to Subcontractors, or if he fails to pursue the work in accordance with the Contract Documents or schedules established, or fails to supply enough skilled supervisors, or workmen, or materials, tools, equipment, or supplies, or the proper quality (including failure occasioned by strike, picketing, boycott, or other cessation of the work),or if he interferes with or disrupts or threatens to interfere or disrupt the operations of the Owner, or any other Contractor or Subcontractor, which by reason of labor dispute, picketing, boycott, other cause, or if he is otherwise guilty of a substantial violation of the provisions of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his Surety, if any, two (2) days notice, or immediately in the event the default will, in the reasonable judgment of the Owner, endanger the project if permitted to continue, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and materials in the Contractor’s shop or in transit, and my finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished.


14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, and the Owner confirms that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, two (2) days’ written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

1. take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor

2. accept assignment of subcontractors pursuant to Section 5.4; and 3. finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.

Paragraph 14.2.4, REVISE the paragraph as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including

compensation for the Architects services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall, upon application, be certified by the Architect in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.


14.2.5 In addition to, and not in substitution of the remedies herein specified, the Owner may, with cause, upon two (2) days written notice to the Contractor, provide or arrange for the provision of such workmen and materials necessary to continue and complete the work contracted for hereunder for the account of the Contractor and at Contractor’s cost and expense, and apply any and all funds which may become due to the Contractor thereto, all without terminating, rescinding, or voiding this Agreement of releasing the Contractor from any liability hereunder.

of 24

Paragraph 14.4.1; REVISE the paragraph as follows: 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for the Owner’s

convenience and without cause. Termination by the Owner under this Paragraph shall be by a notice of termination delivered to the Contractor specifying the extent of termination and the effective date.


14.4.2 Upon receipt of a notice of termination for convenience, the Contractor shall immediately in accordance with instructions from the Owner, proceed with performance of the following duties regardless of delay in determining or adjusting amounts due under this Paragraph.

.1 cease operation as specified in the notice; .2 place no further orders and enter into no further Subcontracts for materials, labor

services or facilities except as necessary to complete on-going portions of the Contract as directed by the Owner;

.3 terminate all Subcontracts and orders to the extent they relate to the Work terminated;

.4 proceed to complete the performance of Work not terminated; and .5 take actions that may be necessary or that the Owner may direct, for the

protection and preservation of the terminated Work.

Paragraph 14.4.3; REVISE the paragraph as follows: 14.4.3 Upon such termination, the Contractor shall recover as its sole remedy payment for Work properly

performed in connection with the terminated portion of the Work prior to the effective date of termination and for items properly and timely fabricated off the Project site, delivered and stored in accordance with the Owner’s Instructions. The Contractor herby waives and forfeits all other claims for payment and damages including without limitation, anticipated profits.


14.4.4 The Owner shall be credited for (1) payments previously made to the Contractor for the terminated portion of the Work, (2) potential claims which the Owner has against the Contractor under the Contract and (3) the value of the materials, supplies, equipment or other items that are to be disposed of by the Contractor that are part of the Contract Sum. The Owner may at its option also require that the Contractor assign the balance of the Contract to another Contractor of the Owner’s choosing. If the Contractor fails or refuse to execute any documents necessary to effectuate such assignment, the Owner may execute such documents on behalf of the Contractor.

ADD the following paragraphs:

15.1 Policies of Employment 15.1.1 The Contractor shall maintain the policies of employment as follows: The Contractor and all

Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin or age. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, national origin or age. Such action shall include but not limited to the following: Employment upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training including apprenticeship.

15.1.2 The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for

employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination.

15.1.3 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regards to race, religion, color, sex, national origin, or age.

15.1.4 Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Requirements are part of the Conditions of the Contract.

of 24

15.1.5 The Maryland General Assembly has enacted a law that prohibits a person who enters into a contract with the Washington County Board of Education from knowingly employing an individual to work at a school if the individual is a registered sex offender.

It is your duty as a person who has or, who may have, a contract with the Washington County Board of Education to confirm whether an individual you plan to assign to work at a Washington County school is a registered sex offender.

A person who violates this law is guilty of a misdemeanor and or conviction is subject to imprisonment not exceeding five (5) years or a fine not exceeding $5,000.00 or both

In the event you assign an individual to work at a Washington County school and a claim or lawsuit is asserted against the Washington County Board of Education or any of its employees or agents as a result of such act or omission, you must indemnify and hold harmless the Washington County Board of Education and its employees and agents from any and all loses, expenses, litigation expenses, attorney’s fees, court costs, settlements, judgments or the like.

15.1.6 "Protection of Resident Workers Clause - The contractor shall comply with all federal, State and local laws, regulations and ordinances applicable to its activities and obligations under this contract. The Immigration & Nationality Act (INA) includes provisions addressing employment eligibility, employment verification, and nondiscrimination. Under the INA, employers may hire only persons who may legally work in the United States, (i.e., citizens and nationals of the U.S.) and aliens authorized to work in the U. S. The employer must verify the identity and employment eligibility of anyone to be hired. The contractor shall establish appropriate procedures and controls so no services or products under the contract documents will be performed or manufactured by any worker who is not legally eligible to perform such services or employment. For more information, visit the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services website: www.uscis.gov."

END OF SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS

http://www.uscis.gov/

DIVISION 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

HEALTH SUITE EXPANSION AT NORTH HAGERSTOWN HIGH SCHOOL

WASHINGTON COUNTY, MARYLAND

SUMMARY OF WORK 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the Work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes the following:

1. Project Information 2. Schedule 3. Contractor Responsibilities 4. General Installation Provisions 5. Cleaning and Protecting 6. Use of Premises and Temporary Facilities 7. Owner's Occupancy Requirements 8. Work Restrictions 9. Specification Formats and Conventions 10. Work Scope

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Health Suite Expansion at North Hagerstown High School

B. Location: North Hagerstown High School

1200 Pennsylvania Avenue Hagerstown, Maryland 21742

C. Owner: Washington County Public Schools

10435 Downsville Pike Hagerstown, Maryland 21740

D. Architect: Bushey Feight Morin Architects

473 North Potomac Street Hagerstown, Maryland 21740

E. Bid Number: 2015-38




F. Project Description:

Selective demolition and interior renovations to create a larger health suite for the North Hagerstown High School students.

No exterior work is included.

It is not expected that Hazardous Materials including ACMs (Asbestos Containing Materials) will be encountered in the Work. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

1.4 SCHEDULE

A. The Contract Award is anticipated to occur on April 21, 2015 and the “Notice of Award” letter will be issued immediately.

B. The Contractor shall provide all required submittals to the Owner and Architect within thirty (30) days after the “Notice of Award” is issued, or sooner if necessary to avoid delay of work.

C. The Field Work Start Date is June 15, 2015.

D. The Total Project Substantial Completion Date is August 12, 2015. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining the Certificate of Occupancy from the City of Hagerstown on or before the Substantial Completion Date. The Final Project Completion Date is September 2, 2015.

E. The Contractor shall order materials as soon as submittals are approved by the Architect so that the materials are in possession upon commencement of field work. If any materials can be delivered prior to the last day of school, the Contractor is responsible for proper offsite storage.

F. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s approval a detailed Work

Plan and Construction Schedule for the Work within ten (10) days after the “Notice of Award” is issued.

G. Contractor shall maintain at all times sufficient manpower levels to meet scheduling requirements and avoid delay to completion of work.

H. Liquidated Damages: 1. Total Project: Should the Work not be performed on or before the times stated, there will be

deducted from the Contract Balance the sum of one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) per consecutive calendar days, as Liquidated Damages, but not as a penalty, for each day's delay after expiration of such period, and until final completion of the Work and its acceptance by the Owner. Plus the contractor will be held responsible for additional extended general conditions, consumables, and direct labor costs to the Third Party Inspectors and the Architect for work and re-inspections required until the “Contract Work” is determined to be acceptable by the Owner.

2. Completion of Punchlist Items: Should the Contractor fail to correct punchlist items within the 15 day period (beginning the date of the receipt of the list) there will be deducted from the Contract Balance the sum of fifty dollars ($50.00) per item per consecutive calendar days, as Liquidated Damages, but not as a penalty, for each day's delay after expiration of such period, and until final completion of the Work and its acceptance by the Owner.




1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES includes but is not limited to the following:

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

B. Receive and unload products at site. Inspect for completeness and damage. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

C. Handle, store, install and finish products.

D. Pay legally required sales, consumer and use taxes.

E. When it is necessary to modify or interrupt existing utility service, the Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 14 days prior to the planned work. Obtain the Owner’s written approval.

F. All Labor, Materials, Equipment, and Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution

and completion of work. This includes but is not limited to multiple mobilizations and any escalation in material and fuel costs throughout the duration of the project.

G. Perform all work to comply with the rules and the regulations of the governing bodies and state

and local laws.

H. The Owner shall obtain and pay for the Building Permit. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits and inspections required by law for the execution of this Work. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating scheduling all inspections with the City of Hagerstown Code Administration and the State and City Fire Marshals as necessary. Provide all permits and inspection certificates to the Owner for their records.

J. All utility usage charges for permanent services during construction shall be by the Owner. All temporary services and usage charges required by the Contractor to perform their Work shall be arranged for and paid for by the Contractor.

K. Field Engineering:

1. Contractor shall be solely responsible for properly laying out the work and for all lines and

measurements for all of the work executed under the Contract Documents. 2. All dimensions and grades shown on Drawings are believed to be correct, but the Contractor

shall verify them at the site and notify the Owner and Architect in writing of any discrepancies found before proceeding with the work. In the absence of such notifications, extra work caused by discrepancies shall not entitle Contractor’s to additional compensation.

3. Working from lines and levels established by property survey, and as shown in relation to the

work. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated); do not scale drawings to determine dimensions. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper location and level of all the work and for the maintenance of the reference lines and bench marks.

L. Work by Others:

1. The Owner will maintain use of its school building located on the premises.

2. The Owner will maintain the right to have additional trade contractors (at its discretion) working on site during the course of the project.




1.6 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Each Installer is required to inspect substrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report, in writing to the Owner and the Architect, unsatisfactory conditions.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with

manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation when they are more explicit or more stringent than the requirements indicated in Contract Documents.

C. Inspect each item of material or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged

and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicated. Allow for expansions and movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to the Architect for final decision.

E. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each

installation.

F. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with entire work.

G. Concealed Work: Coordinate enclosure of work, with the Owner and the Architect and with

required inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. Record exact locations of utility work on Record Drawings.

H. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at

industry-recognized standard mounting heights, or at heights specified by applicable codes, for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Owner and Architect for final decision.

I. Enclose and conceal from view wiring, conduit, ducts, heat piping, sprinkler piping, water piping

and other utility lines in habitable rooms and spaces, unless otherwise shown or specified.

J. Where not otherwise shown, match adjacent masonry, gypsum board or other finish construction to form the enclosing chase or furring.

K. Locate sprinkler heads, ceiling diffusers, lighting fixtures, grilles, speakers and other similar items

in ceiling lay-in panels centered in both directions or to fill a full ceiling grid module.

L. Coordination: Do not fabricate or install ductwork, electric conduit, pull boxes, piping and other mechanical items above suspended ceilings until the coordination process has verified that there will be no interference and that the space for construction materials, equipment, fixtures and finishes specified by the design requirements can be maintained. Prior to fabrication and installation, promptly report to the Owner and Architect apparent interference or difficulties anticipated.




1.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. During handling and installation of work at project site, clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure work is free from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period.

B. Limiting Exposure of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and protection

methods, supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include where applicable (but not by way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, improper shipping/handling, theft and vandalism.

C. Construct work in accordance with project schedule; coordinate the schedule and operations with

the Owner.

1.8 USE OF PREMISES AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES

General: During the construction period, the Contractor shall have limited use of the premises. Use of any areas other than those in which work is done is prohibited.

A. Use of Site: Confine construction operations to areas within the limits indicated on the Contract Documents. Do not disturb the building and property beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

B. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of facility and use by the Public during the entire construction period for the portions of the facility not being disturbed by construction. Maintain code compliant egress in Owner occupied spaces.

C. Contractor has access to schools’ water supply for use during construction.

D. Temporary toilet facilities are not required; a school restroom will be designated for contractor use at the facility.

E. Contractor use of the school's phone or internet services is not permitted.

F. Parking: During construction operations, contractor parking is limited to the discretion of the Owner.

G. Contractor field office trailer(s) will not be permitted on school property for this project.

H. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving the premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials without obtaining prior written authorization from the Owner.




1. Schedule and coordinate deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on-site.

3. Lay down and staging areas will be established jointly by the Contractor and the Owner within the Construction Limits of Disturbance.

1.9 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the building and property for the duration of the project. Cooperate with the Owner during the construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner and Public usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Public and the Owner’s day-to-day operations. Maintain existing entrances and exits. Provide not less than 14 days' notice to the Owner of activities that will affect the Public and the Owner's operations.

B. Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. The Architect will prepare a Punchlist for each specific portion or area(s) of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

2. The Contractor is to obtain approval from Authorities Having Jurisdiction before Owner occupancy of completed spaces.

3. Prior to Owner occupancy, all work shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. Upon completion of the project, the Owner and Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion indicating acceptance.

4. Upon Project Substantial Completion, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of work.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Washington County Public Schools operates on a 10-hour day, 4-day work week during the summer, so North Hagerstown High School is closed on Fridays during the summer. Therefore, the Contractor’s normal working hours during the summer are Monday through Thursday when the school is open. If the Contractor chooses to work evenings and/or on a Friday, Saturday, or Sunday when schools are closed, the Contractor must request written approval from WCPS at least four (4) days in advance of needing access to the school and must pay the $25.00 per hour rate at a minimum of four (4) hours for custodial coverage on these days. Work requiring inspections cannot be completed on the weekend.

B. Contractor shall prioritize the safety of students and staff while working in the occupied building

and shall take all necessary precautions to protect the wellbeing of all occupants at all times.

C. The Contractor is responsible for conducting construction activities so as to minimize impact to spaces outside of the project area and so as to avoid any disruption to school activities.




D. All work to comply with the Noise Restrictions of the local governing authority.

E. All workers on site are to wear hardhats, clean clothes (shirts & pants – no shorts), protective eyeglasses and protective footwear, and visible identification badges displayed at all times. The Contractor is responsible for providing identification badges for all workers.

F. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Owner not less than 14 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving the Owner’s written permission.

1.11 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

C. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

a. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by each Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by each Contractor or by others when so noted.

b. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

D. Definitions

a. The terms “Architect”, “Engineer”, “Architect/Engineer” and “A/E” are used interchangeably throughout the specifications.

b. The terms “Owner”, “Washington County Public Schools” and “WCPS” and the “Board of Education” and the “BOE” are used interchangeably throughout the specifications.




1.12 WORK SCOPE The scope of work includes but is not limited to providing all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals to complete all Work in accordance with the specifications, drawings and applicable codes. All Work is to be performed as shown on the Contract Drawings and Specifications in the Project Manual. In addition to the above, the scope includes but is not limited to the Division 0 Procurement and Contract Requirements, and Division 1 General Requirements of the Project Manual. THE SCOPE OF WORK IS TO INCLUDE, but is not limited to, the following items:

1. Contractor shall provide all required submittals to the Architect within thirty (30) days after issuance of “Notice of Award”/”Notice to Proceed”, or sooner if necessary to avoid delay of work.

2. Contractor shall be required to conduct his activities in a safe manner and shall be responsible for observing the safety regulations of MOSH, OSHA, and local life safety agencies. Contractor to provide all OSHA specified protection required, including fall protection.

3. Contractor shall maintain at all times sufficient manpower levels to meet scheduling requirements

and avoid delay to completion of work.

4. Contractor shall provide as-built drawings and warranty of all work under this Contract. Provide copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in the format and quantity indicated in the documents. Provide instruction of Owner's personnel on maintenance of equipment and material installed by this Contract.

5. Contractor must be on site to receive and unload construction material deliveries. WCPS staff is not responsible for receiving any deliveries for this construction project. Contractor is responsible for own lifting and hoisting.

6. Contractor shall protect all existing finishes when receiving deliveries and removing trash through

areas of the facility outside the limits of disturbance. Contractor shall protect all finished areas of work adjacent to area of new work as construction progresses within the project limits.

7. Provide dumpsters or trucking required to clean and remove daily from site all excess material and debris connected with this work. Should the Contractor’s cleanup be unsatisfactory, the Owner shall perform the work at the Contractor’s expense. If dumpsters are utilized, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to identify a mutually agreeable location prior to commencement of work. The Contractor is responsible for preventing damage to property, such as by setting the dumpsters on plywood in paved areas, and is responsible for repairing any damage occurring as result of the dumpsters.

8. The Owner will clear furniture surfaces and remove loose furniture in the project area prior to demolition. The Contractor shall protect bulk furniture and built-ins within and adjacent to the project area by covering them with plastic sheets throughout demolition and construction. Once renovations are complete, the Contractor is responsible for removing the plastic sheets and thoroughly vacuuming and cleaning the entire project area.

9. Contractor shall provide final cleaning of all new and existing surfaces within the project limits. Include cleaning all glazing. Including wet mop of floor tile only; the Owner will wax the floors. Prior to final cleaning, Contractor shall remove all miscellaneous labels, stickers, and shipping protection from all hardware and other finish products. Do NOT remove any fire rating labels.




10. Prior to the installation of new flooring, the Contractor is responsible for properly preparing the existing concrete floor substrate and for applying leveling and patching compounds for a smooth and level floor finish. Contractor is responsible for grinding down existing concrete as necessary for a smooth and level floor finish. Contractor shall provide new flooring to match, and properly transition to, existing adjacent flooring.

11. Contractor shall patch and refinish existing walls and ceilings that are adjacent to, and affected by, work performed under this contract as necessary for a finished product in exposed areas. Contractor shall patch existing masonry walls and drywall partitions as necessary to maintain wall rating at the top of walls and at through-wall penetrations above the ceiling.

12. Contractor shall provide all priming, block filling, and finish painting of all drywall, CMU, door frames, and other interior surfaces as required and as indicated in the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for all required surface preparation prior to application of finishes, including, but not limited to scraping, sanding, puttying, etc. Provide interior caulking between surfaces of dissimilar materials such as at hollow metal frames in drywall or block walls, CMU block abutting drywall construction, interior joints of painted wood surfaces, etc.

13. Contractor shall turn over all keys, tagged and marked in an acceptable manner to the Owner.

14. Project Administration: a. The Contractor is responsible for project budget, project construction schedule, project

coordination, project administration and overall site management, including safety and security.

b. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of demolition and new construction work between various trades.

c. Contractor shall comply with the directives of the Owner, and respond to the comments from the Architect for this Project.

15. Contractor is responsible for testing costs resulting from negligence, poor workmanship, or failure

of work to meet the requirement of the documents. Any work determined to have been performed in a negligent manner by the Contractor shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

16. Contractor is responsible for taking all precautions necessary to ensure all existing power and

data lines and connections remain intact throughout construction. The Contractor is responsible for verifying that all power and data lines and connections and devices are in operating order upon completion of the project and if not, the Contractor is responsible for repair and/or replacement.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 20 00 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Schedule of values.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit printed schedule AIA Form G702 - Application and Certifications for Payment with AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet.

B. Submit electronic copy of the Schedule of Values within fifteen (15) days after date

established in Notice to Proceed for review by Owner and Architect. Review to incorporate comments from Owner/Architect to gain written approval.

C. Format: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with

number and title of major Specification Sections. Identify bonds as a separate cost. Separate labor from materials and equipment.

D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 27 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 27 00 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 00 72 13 - General Conditions: Progress Payments and Final Payment. B. Section 00 52 13 - Contract Agreement: Contract Sum/Price and amounts of Progress

Payments and Retainages time schedule for submittals. C. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Schedule of Values. D. Section 01 28 00 - Change Order Procedures: Procedures for changes to the Work. E. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. G. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Final Payment. 1.03 FORMAT A. AIA Form G702 – Application and Certification for Payment and G703 – Continuation

Sheet. B. Address applications to Washington County Public Schools. C. For each item, provide a column for listing: Item Number; Description of work; Scheduled

Value, Previous Applications: Work in Place and Site Stored Materials under this Application; Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application; Percentage of Completion; Balance to Finish; and Retainage.

D. Utilize Table of Contents to identify each line item with number and title of the major

specification section. E. The period covered by each application shall be projected through the end of the month. 1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS

A. Present required information in typewritten draft form and submit via email no later than the 25th of each month.

B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for site stored products.

01 27 00-2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

E. The current IAC/PSCP Form 306.4 (MBE Attachment G) “Certified MBE Participation

Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment” must be signed and included in each application for payment.

F. A partial lien waiver for previous payments must be signed, notarized, and included in each application for payment (lien waiver amount is to be cumulative).

G. Unless previously approved by the Owner, payments shall not be made for materials and/or equipment stored off the site. Requests must be made on an item by item basis and each request must be made well in advance of the pencil copy submission for the intended pay period.

H. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01 73 00. 1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Upon approval of each draft application, submit four (4) sealed originals of each

Application for Payment no later than the last day of each month. B. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. C. Submit updated LEED information/narrative with each application for payment. D. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. 1.06 OFF SITE STORED MATERIAL

A. Contractor shall comply with Article 9.3.2 in the AIA Document A201 – 1997 as amended by the Board of Education of Washington County for payment of stored materials.

B. WCPS supports contractors’ initiative to order material in advance so that it is ready when needed and contractors are permitted to bill for materials stored off-site. However, contractors must gain WCPS’ approval in advance to bill for off-site stored material and it is best if they start the process early when they know they want to include it on the next pay app. Stored materials and equipment will be considered on a case by case basis contingent upon each contractor’s compliance with procedures satisfactory to WCPS. A summary of the guidelines are as follows: 1. Materials/equipment must be project-specific and fabricated for subsequent

incorporation in the work. Payment will not be approved for the storage of raw materials common to any construction project (sheet metal, studs, fasteners, etc.)

2. Materials/equipment must be properly identified on at least two sides for the specific project including the name of project, product/equipment identification, and location to be installed (i.e. Classroom 222, Corridor 020, etc.)

3. Materials/equipment must be stored in a secure location that provides suitable protection for the work and prevents diversion to another project. Contractor shall provide insurance documentation for the storage facility.

WCPS: North High APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 27 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

4. Materials/equipment must be available for inspection by WCPS and/or the Architect. Contractor shall coordinate with WCPS to arrange for a visit to the storage facility. WCPS has the option to request photos in lieu of visiting the storage facility.

5. Contractors are responsible for establishing Owner’s title to such materials and equipment and to otherwise protect the Owner’s interest and shall include applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

1.07 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying

dollar amounts in question. B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application

number and date, and line item by number and description. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01 28 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 28 00 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Documentation of change in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Execution of change orders. E. Correlation of Contractor submittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 72 13 - General Conditions: Governing requirements for changes in the Work,

in Contract Sum/Price, and Contract Time.

B. Section 00 72 14 - General Conditions – WCPS Supplement: Percentage Allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit.

C. Section 00 52 13 - Contract Agreement: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead

and profit.

D. Section 01 20 00 – Price and Payment Procedures: Schedule of Values. E. Section 01 27 00 - Applications for Payment. F. Section 01 60 00 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions.

G. Section 01 73 00 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible

for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work.

B. Change Order Forms: A.I.A. Form G701 - Change Order. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM/PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information

required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work.

B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation.

C. Provide data to support computations including, but not limited to; 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.

01 28 00-2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit. 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with

additional information: 1. Origin and date of claim. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an

adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1997 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710.

B. The Architect/Engineer may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description

of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within fourteen (14) working days.

C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect/

Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

D. Change Order Forms: Change Order Request Proposal attached at the end of this section.

1.06 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of

parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.07 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each

authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum/Price. B. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise

sub-schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Proposal Request Form

Project Name:

Date:Proposal Request #: Prime Contractor: Subcontractor: Sub-Subcontractor:

Proposal Scope (Include a brief description of the work)

A. Labor, Materials, EquipmentA.1 Direct Payroll - wages less burden (no fringes, insurances, taxes, etc) -$ A.2 Material Cost -$ A.3 Equipment Rental -$ A.4 Direct Equipment Cost -$

Subtotal A - Labor, Materials, Equipment: -$ A

B. Overhead & ProfitAllowable Overhead & Profit = (Subtotal A) x (% listed below)15% $0.00 - $1,000 -$ 10% $1,001 - $5,000 -$ 7% $5,001 - $10,000 -$ 5% $10,001 - $25,000 -$ over $25,000 negotiable not to exceed 5% -$

Subtotal B - Overhead & Profit: -$ B

C. Sales Tax (6% x (A.2 + A.3)) -$ C

D. Labor Burden % x A.1 -$ DMust provide back-up to substantiate Labor Burden Rate

E. Subcontractor CostSubcontractor Cost (Provide detailed breakdown on separate form) -$ Allowable Prime Contractor Mark-Up (5% of Subcontractor Cost) -$

Subtotal E - Subcontractor Cost: -$ E

F. Subtotal (A+B+C+D+E) -$ F

G. Bond (1% of F) -$ G

H. TOTAL COST = F + G -$

SECTION 01 31 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

WCPS: North High ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 31 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion


A. Coordination and project conditions.

B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting.

D. Site mobilization meeting.

E. Progress meetings.

F. Preinstallation meetings.

1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible

with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment.

C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical

Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within

construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy.

F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of

defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. The General Contractor shall employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Maryland and acceptable to Owner/Architect/Engineer.

B. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify

Architect/Engineer of discrepancies discovered.

01 31 00-2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings.

D. Verify set-backs and easements; confirm drawing dimensions and elevations.

E. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices.

F. Submit copy of site drawing and certificate signed by Land Surveyor certifying

elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with Contract Documents.

G. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as Work progresses.

H. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

I. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference

points during construction.

J. Promptly report to General Contractor loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

K. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no

changes without prior written notice to Architect/Engineer. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Owner/Architect will schedule meeting after Notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor.

C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and

progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Architect/Engineer. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

7. Scheduling. 8. Scheduling activities of Testing and Inspection Agency. 9. Review LEED rating and credit criteria, processes and verification materials. 10. Permits and inspection procedures.

D. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to major participants.

1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING

A. Owner/Architect will schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.

WCPS – ‘West City’ ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 31 00-3 Elementary School

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Special Consultants, and Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors.

C. Agenda:

1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Contractor. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Application for payment procedures. 9. Procedures for testing. 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction

period.

D. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants.

1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The Owner/Architect will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum two (2) week intervals.

B. The General Contractor will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with

copies for participants, preside at meetings.

C. Attendance Required: Contractor, major subcontractors, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work.

E. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants.

1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING

A. When required in individual specification sections, the contractor shall convene preinstallation meeting at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section.

01 31 00-4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section.

C. Notify Owner/Architect/Engineer seven (7) days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. The Contractor will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after

meeting to participants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULE 01 32 30-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 32 30- NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201-1997; specifically paragraphs, 3.10, 4.3.7, and Article 8.

B. Supplement to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201-1997; specifically paragraphs, 3.9.6, 3.10.1, 4.3.7.1, 4.3.7.3, 8.1.3, 8.2.4, and 8.3.1.

C. Division One of the Specifications

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Definitions 1. Activity: A discrete element of the Project that consumes time, uses

resources, and can be used for planning, monitoring, and controlling the progress of the Work.

2. Constraint: A schedule software mechanism that when imposed on an activity overrides the existing logical relationship to other activities. Examples are: “start on”, “start no earlier”, “finish on, “finish no later”, etc.

3. CPM: The “Critical Path Method” of scheduling the work that determines the sequence and the time of performance of activities based on their logical connections.

4. Critical Path: The longest chain or chains of interconnected activities from the start of the first activity thru Final Completion.

5. Data Date: The date that is used for the mathematical calculation of the schedule for activities that have not been completed.

6. Float: “Free Float” is the time that an activity can be delayed before adversely affecting a successor activity. “Total Float” is the time that an activity can be delayed before adversely affecting the Critical Path of the Project.

7. Milestone: An element of the schedule having no duration that identifies the start or completion of activities or groups of activities in the schedule.

8. Predecessor: An activity that controls the start or finish of an activity that occurs later in the sequence of the schedule. That later activity is referred to as the “Successor” to the predecessor activity.

9. Recovery Schedule: A schedule that revises the sequence and or duration of uncompleted activities in order to overcome projected delays to the Substantial Completion Date or as determined by the existence of negative float for critical activities.

10. Restraint: The logical relationship between predecessors and successors such as: “start to start”, “finish to start”, or “finish to finish”.

01 32 30-2 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULE WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

11. Substantial Completion Date: Reference section 8.1.3 of the Supplement to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201-1997.

12. Updated Schedule: A schedule that recalculates the balance of work to be performed from a previous schedule using a later data date, records the actual starts and actual finishes of activities that have progressed since the previous data date, and determines the remaining duration of activities in progress.

B. Quality Assurance 1. If schedules are self-performed, Contractor will designate an individual or

individuals with no less than 4 years experience preparing and managing CPM schedules for projects of comparable size and complexity as the Project.

2. Alternatively, the Contractor may elect to retain the services of a consulting firm that specializes in the preparation and management of CPM schedules.

3. Contractor’s submission of schedule to the Owner will indicate the Contractor’s complete review, approval, and accuracy of the submitted schedule.

C. Coordination 1. CPM schedules will be coordinated and consistent with pay application

schedule of values, submittal schedules, and other schedules and reports required under the Contract.

2. Actual starts and finishes will be consistent with daily construction reports and other contemporaneous job records.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. This schedule specification is provided in order to provide the Owner with a tool with which to evaluate the reasonableness of the Contractor’s planning, assess implementation of the schedule, and to assist in the approval of progress payments.

B. Review of the Contractor’s schedules or reports by the Owner or Agents of the Owner does not modify the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract, and does not validate any of the data, assumptions, logic, or durations contained in the Contractor’s schedules or reports.

C. Review of the Contractor’s schedules does not provide any indication that the Owner or Agents of the Owner have agreed with the reasonableness of the Contractor’s planning or that the Project can be performed or completed as scheduled.

D. The Contractor has the duty to mitigate the impact of delays which may include resequencing work that is not affected by the delay.

E. A meeting will be held with the Contractor, Owner, and Architect when the Contractor has completed the Baseline Schedule to allow the Contractor to present the schedule. A suggested list of topics follows:


1. Contractor’s overview of the network diagram structure Including group coding structure and calendars used.

2. Projected critical and near-critical paths. 3. Contractor’s proposed identification of building areas for a clear and

organized sequence of construction and for easy reference throughout construction. Present for review by Owner and A/E. Staging of equipment and materials.

4. Key submittals and approvals that may impact progress. 5. Key subcontractors and vendors that may impact schedule. 6. Permits.

F. The schedule shall accurately reflect the Contractors construction means, methods, techniques, sequence and procedures. The Owner’s review of submitted schedules shall not be construed as limiting the Contractor’s means and methods to complete the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NETWORK DIAGRAMS

A. General Requirements 1. Provide all schedules using the critical path method (CPM). All activities

except the first activity will have predecessors. All activities except the Substantial Completion Date will have successors.

2. Only the first activity and the last activity are allowed to have constraints without the Owner’s written approval. The Substantial Completion Date as modified by executed change orders will have a “finish on or after” constraint.

3. Schedules will be calculated using the Retained Logic option provided by the scheduling software. The Progress Override option will not be used without the Owner’s written approval.

4. Primavera Version 6.0 (a product of the Oracle Corporation) will be used as the software for all schedules to facilitate review by the Owner. Alternative software proposed by the Contractor must be presented to, and approved by the Owner via addendum, during the bid process through specified procedures, in order to be accepted in lieu of Primavera Version 6.0.

5. Schedules will be submitted to Owner and Architect in accordance with Part 3, 3.2 Submittal Schedule of this Section.

6. Failure of the Contractor to provide acceptable Preliminary, Baseline, Update, or Recovery schedules within the time limits stated below shall be sufficient cause to withhold approval of the Contractor’s application for payment until the submitted schedule meets the specified requirements.

B. Preliminary Schedule 1. Provide a CPM schedule for activities planned for the first 60 cal. days of

work.


2. Provide submission, review, fabrication and delivery activities for all work, especially key materials and equipment that affect the critical path and/or have long lead times.

3. Provide a summary bar chart for the balance of the Project. Constraints are allowed for this portion of the schedule.

C. Baseline Schedule 1. Provide a CPM from the date of the Notice to Proceed to Substantial

Completion and Final Completion in sufficient detail to accurately reflect all distinct activities required to complete the Contract.

2. Durations a. As a general rule the length of construction activities shall be

limited to 15 work days in order to minimize the length of leads and lags.

b. If asked by the Owner, the Contractor shall be required to verify the reasonableness of the duration of specific activities based on the scheduled value of labor and projected crew sizes.

c. Anticipated lost days, as specified in 4.3.7.3 of the Supplement to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201-1997, due to adverse weather are to be included in activity durations.

3. Activities to include at a minimum: a. Submittal, review, and fabrication activities for all work that may

be delayed by fabrication, procurement, or other long lead times. b. Installation by group code. c. Sediment and erosion control sequence of construction. d. Equipment Startup. e. MEPS Commissioning. f. Inspections including foundations, wall and ceiling close-ins, and

building and MEPS finals. g. Owner activities as required. h. Final building cleaning.

4. Group Codes- Provide as a minimum the following for each activity: a. Phase b. General Area (site general, site utilities, building, administrative,

etc.) c. Specific Area (foundations, exterior, rough-ins, finishes, etc.) d. Responsibility (trade, subcontractor, vendor, Owner, Architect,

etc.) 5. Milestones

6. Format


a. Provide native files of all submitted schedules (for P6- “xer” file extensions)

b. Network diagram 1) PDF in ledger size (11 x 17) in color. 2) Critical Path bars- bright red.

c. Tabular section 1) Include ID, Description, original duration, remaining

duration, early start and early finish columns. 2) Either included predecessors and successors in columns or

in a separate report.

D. Schedule Updates 1. Update the previously submitted schedule by providing the following:

a. Actual Starts b. Actual Finishes c. Remaining Duration for activities in progress d. Determine the Remaining Duration by the days required for

completion, not the % complete of the Original Duration. 2. Submit the Updated Schedule without changes.

E. Schedule Revisions 1. Provide all changes to the updated schedule in a separate submission to

facilitate the Owner’s review including changes in activity duration, restraints, sequencing, group codes, added or deleted activities, or activity descriptions.

2. If the updated schedule projects a Substantial Completion Date more than 14 cal. days after the Substantial Completion Date, the Contractor shall provide a separate schedule that includes changes in logic or durations necessary to project a Substantial Completion Date in accordance with the Contract.

3. For substantial delays spanning multiple update periods provide a separate Recovery Schedule.

2.2 NARRATIVE REPORTS

A. Required for all updates and revised update submissions.

B. Include in each Narrative 1. Discussion of current projected critical and near-critical paths. 2. Listing of critical work days lost due to adverse weather conditions. 3. Significant changes proposed and included in the revised update. 4. Discussion of potential delays to remaining work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Provide submittals in accordance with the Specification Division One requirements and Part 3, 3.2 Submittal Schedule of this Section. Section 01 32 30 shall supersede all other contract documents for any differences or ambiguity in Schedule submittal requirements within the contract documents.

3.2 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preliminary Schedule- 2 weeks from the NTP

B. Baseline Schedule- 6 weeks from the NTP

C. Updated Schedules- Monthly, 7 cal. days prior to the submission of pay applications.

D. Revised Updated Schedules- Concurrently with the submission of schedule updates.

E. Recovery Schedules- Provide when critical path delays are substantial or span multiple update periods, or when requested by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


A. All Bid Documents, including, but not limited to: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Instructions to Bidders, Supplemental Instructions to bidders, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Addenda and Division 1 of these Specifications Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Color/Pattern Selection 5. Maintenance/Operation Manuals 6. Warranties/Bonds 7. Other submittals required by the Contract Documents, and re-submittals

necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements. 8. Submittal cover sheet.

B. Related Sections: Individual requirements for submittals also may be described in

pertinent Sections of these Specifications; the following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. 1. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requiements 3. Section 01 35 10 - Sustainable Project Requirements 4. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 5. Various Sections - Warranties

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Work-related submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as follows, but not limited to: 1. Shop Drawings: Include specially-prepared technical data for this Project,

including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard print for general application to a range of similar projects.

2. Product Data: Includes standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not specially-prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein.

3. Samples: Includes both fabricated and un-fabricated physical examples of materials, products and units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work; either for limited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis.

4. Mock-Ups: Are a special form of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in specified manner for transmittal of sample submittals.

01 33 00-2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Coordination of Submittals: 1. Prior to each transmittal of a submittal, carefully review, verify and coordinate all

aspects of each item being submitted. 2. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with the

specified requirements. 3. Each copy of all submittals shall bear the required Contractor’s Certification

Stamp indicating that his review, verification and coordination has been performed.

4. Any submittals not bearing said stamp will be returned to the Contractor for re-submission without further consideration, in such event, it will be deemed that the Contractor has not complied with this requirement and that the Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays to the same extent as if no submittal had been made.

5. Identification of Submittals: Place a copy of the submittal cover sheet on each copy of all submittals for identification. At minimum on the cover sheet indicate the: a. Project name b. Date c. The name of the Contractor that prepared the submittal d. Specification Section Number, Title and item reference within, if applicable e. Submittal Identification Number comprised of Section Number and

Sequential Number (example 15 00 00 – 001). f. Drawing sheet number and detail reference(s), designation(s) g. Any submittals that do not include the required cover sheet shall be returned

to the Contractor for resubmission. 6. Submittal Transmittal Requirements:

a. Submit original b. Identify items from only one Division of the Contract Documents on each

transmittal, i.e. do not list items from Division 8 and 9 on the same transmittal.

7. Resubmittals: a. Provide resubmittal suffix; the original submittal number on your new

transmittal, eg. Resubmittal of “15 00 00-001” identified as “15 00 00-001R”.

1.5 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractors responsibilities for compliance with the requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architects/Consulting Engineer’s review of submittals

B. Notify Architect, in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements

of Contract Documents.

C. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Consulting Engineer’s stamp and initials or signature indicating review.

D. After Architect/Consulting Engineer’s review, the General Contractor will distribute

submittal copies to involved Contractors. Contractors shall ascertain that they have received all submittal information to properly execute and coordinate their work.

E. When a shop drawing or other submittal must be resubmitted by the Contractor, no

changes other than those required as a result of the previous submission shall be made without the Architect/Consulting Engineer being made aware of the change. If such changes are made without so advising the Architect/Consulting Engineer, the Contractor will assume all responsibility for the possible consequences.


F. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or catalog data shall be started nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the review of such item.

1.6 PROCESSING OF SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 1. The Contractor shall, within forty-five (45) calendar days (or sooner, if required

elsewhere in the Contract Documents) after receiving the Owner’s signed Contract, Notice to Proceed, or “Letter of Intent”, forward all submittals to the Architect for review and/or approval.

2. Transmittal of Submittals: a. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. b. Record on transmittal form deviations from Contract Documents

requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include the Contractor’s Certificate that the information complies with the Contract Document’s requirements.

1.7 CONTRACTORS “SUBMITTAL STAMP”

A. Representation: By his submittal of any shop drawings, samples, and product data, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, or will do so; and that he has checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and the Contract Documents requirements.

B. The Contractor shall stamp all shop drawings, samples and product date with the

following certification:

“I certify that the specification requirements have been met and all dimensions, conditions and quantities are verified as shown and/or corrected on this submittal.”

Signed: (For) Contractor

Date:

C. Submittals received without the above certification will be returned, not reviewed. 1.8 SUBSTITUTION REJECTION

A. If a non approved substitution is submitted, it will be returned “Submit Specified Item”. Only previously approved substitutions will be reviewed. Refer to Section

01 60 00 for substitution request procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

01 33 00-4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Before submitting shop drawings for the Architect’s review, the Contractor shall check them for accuracy, shall ascertain that all work contiguous with and having bearing on other work shown on shop drawings is accurately drawn and that the work is in conformity with the Contract Document requirements. 1. The submission of shop drawings or re-submission of corrected shop drawings

constitutes evidence that the Contractor accepts and is willing to perform the work as shown, in a workmanlike manner, and in accordance with the best standard practice.

2. Verify: a. Field measurements b. Field construction criteria c. Catalog numbers and similar data d. Coordination with integral and adjacent components.

B. Types of prints and copies required: 1. Submit electronic (PDF) files of each required Shop Drawings indicating

accurately and in scale sufficiently large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work.

2. Review comments of the Architect or his Consultant Engineer will be shown on the returned files. The General Contractor will print copies from the electronic for his needs.

3. The Architect/Consulting Engineers distribute the shop drawings for the Owner and their use.

4. Electronic files shall be labeled to match the submittal number.

C. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction.

D. Copies of approved shop drawings shall be maintained on site.

3.2 PRODUCT DATA

A. Before submitting product data for Architect’s review the Contractor shall assemble the Product Data into a single electronic submittal for each element of construction or system, including printed formation such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, color charts, letter of certification, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, performance curves, maintenance data, calculations and schedules.

1. Provide three (3) original copies of color charts in addition to electronic copy.

B. Mark copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, mark copies to indicate those items being submitted.

C. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract

Documents has been confirmed. 3.3 SAMPLES

A. Before submitting samples to the Architect for approval, the Contractor shall assure himself that material represented thereby conforms to Contract Requirements and is readily available in the quantity required.


B. Provide samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. 1. Identify as described in “Identification of Submittals”. 2. Provide samples of the size required when a specific sample size is noted.

C. Number of samples required:

1. Unless otherwise specified, submit four (4) sets of each sample. 2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single sample may be submitted for review

and, when approved, be installed in the work at a location agreed upon by the Architect.

D. Field samples/mock-ups: Of sufficient size to clearly illustrate functional

characteristics of product or material unless otherwise indicated by the projects Architect. 1. Construct each complete, including work of all trades required in finished work.

3.4 COLORS, FINISH AND/OR PATTERN SELECTION

A. Submit the precise color and pattern that is specifically called out in the Contract Documents unless a choice of colors or patterns are requested.

B. Number of Copies Required:

1. Submit four (4) color or pattern samples of each specified item requiring color and/or pattern selection.

3.5 ELECTRONIC BACKGROUNDS

A. If the Contractor and/or subcontractors require an electronic file (.DWG) of the construction documents, only plan backgrounds will be provided at a cost of $50.00 per file. 1. Backgrounds will be released with no title blocks. 2. Architect’s/Engineer’s drawings that are resubmitted as a shop drawing will be

rejected.

B. Request must be made in writing to the Architect by the General Contractor.

C. Electronic files will not be released until a check is submitted made to the order of Bushey Feight Morin Architects.

3.6 RESUBMISSION REVIEWS

A. A maximum of two (2) reviews for each submittal will be provided by the Architect/Design Team.

B. If additional (or more) reviews are required, the Contractor will be invoiced on a time

and material basis. 1. The cost of additional reviews will be invoiced to the General Contractor with

payment due in thirty (30) calendar days from the date of the invoice. END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. Quality control and control of installation.

B. Tolerances

C. References.

D. Mock-up requirements.

E. Testing and inspection services.

F. Manufacturers' field services.

G. Examination.

H. Preparation. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by

manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

01 40 00-2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids,

except where specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor

those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents.

1.05 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,

flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and is specified in product

specification sections to be removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect/Engineer.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection.

B. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in

individual specification sections and as required by Architect/Engineer. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location. 2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer, specialist on staff to

review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an

accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

WCPS: North High QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-site testing as required by Architect/Engineer or Owner.

D. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Owner/Contractor/Architect/

Engineer and City of Hagerstown indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.

E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,

tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time

for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and

tests required for Contractor's use.

F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified

requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Owner/Architect/Engineer. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price. All non-conforming work shall be corrected immediately.

H. Agency Responsibilities:

1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and

Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified

standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract

Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or

non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect/Engineer.

I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit copies of typed report to

Owner/Architect/Engineer/City of Hagerstown Inspector and to Contractor in PDF format. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. 11. Sketches, photos, etc… as necessary to clarify location, layout, and conditions of

work.

01 40 00-4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

J. Limits On Testing Authority: a. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of

Contract Documents. b. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. c. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. d. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.07 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, the Contractor shall make arrangements for material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Owner/General Contractor/Architect/Engineer 30

days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Owner.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Provide reports documenting each manufacturer’s field services.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work

being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 45 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 45 00 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures. C. Section 01 35 10 – Sustainable Project Requirements. D. Section 01 60 00 - Materials and Equipment: Product Options and Substitutions. E. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members. 4. Each specification section of the Work shall be responsible for their own cutting and

patching as it relates to their work. It shall be noted that this statement is a revised clarification to the statement made at the Pre-Bid Conference.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.

3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

01 45 00-2 CUTTING AND PATCHING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to

damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices

and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. C. Maintain construction free of water or other environmental exposure that may damage the

work. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete work.

B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.

C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. E. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 3.04 PERFORMANCE

A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather exposed and

moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without

prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

F. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material to full thickness of the penetrated element.

G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest

intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes. 3. Temporary heating. 4. Temporary ventilation. 5. Temporary water service. 6. Temporary sanitary facilities.

B. Construction Facilities:

1. Progress cleaning and waste removal.

C. Temporary Controls: 1. Barriers. 2. Protection of the Work. 3. Security. 4. Dust control. 5. Noise control. 6. Pest control. 7. Pollution control. 8. Rodent control.

D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 35 10 – Sustainable Design Requirements. B. Section 01 73 00 – Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source as needed for

construction operation.

B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed by Architect/Engineer and Owner.

C. Power Service Characteristics: 280/120 volt, 400 ampere, three phase, four wire.

D. Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required

for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment.

E. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location.

F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

01 50 00-2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES WCPS: North High AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS - Health Suite Expansion

1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq.ft.

B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq. ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas entire

site after dark for security purposes.

C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq. ft HID lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes.

D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting

conductors, pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels.

E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction if properly protected from dust or damage.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

B. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Enclosures

article in this section.

C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes after receipt of written approval by the Owner, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.

D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. in areas where construction

is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in product sections. 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Provide and pay for suitable quality water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Connect to existing water source. Provide separate metering, if required, and pay for cost of water used until project substantial completion.

B. General Contractor will pay cost of temporary water. Exercise measures to conserve

energy. Utilize Owner's new water system, extend and supplement with temporary devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with

threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.

WCPS: North High CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

1.8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide facilities at time of project mobilization.

B. Permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations. Maintain daily

in clean and sanitary condition.

C. At end of construction, remove temporary facilities used for construction operations. Return site to original condition or as scheduled.

1.9 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other

closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing spaces.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose

off-site.

E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

1.10 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by authorities having jurisdiction

for public rights-of-way. 1.11 SECURITY

A. Security Program:

1. Protect Work from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry.

B. Entry Control: 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site. 2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request.

1.12 DUST CONTROL

A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

B. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.13 NOISE CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise from equipment and noise produced by construction operations.

01 50 00-4 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES WCPS: North High AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS - Health Suite Expansion

1.14 PEST CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work.

1.15 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 1.16 RODENT CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Remove temporary installed underground and above ground installations. Grade site

as indicated on Drawings.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 50 60- 1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 50 60 – CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this section.

B. Coordinate Construction IAQ Plan with independent Commissioning Authority’s

work and schedule.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 10 00 – Summary

B. Section 01 35 10 – Sustainable Project Requirements

C. Section 01 81 00 – Commissioning

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Sections include: 1. References 2. Definitions 3. System description 4. Submittals 5. Quality assurance 6. Low-emitting materials 7. Project conditions 8. Sequence and scheduling 9. System start-up 10. Indoor air quality testing equipment 11. Preparation 12. Indoor air quality 13. Control measures 14. Field quality control

B. LEED Submittal Requirements for this section (see paragraph 1.07) 1. Indoor air quality procedures (see paragraph 3.02) 2. Control measures (see paragraph 3.03)

a. HVAC Protection b. Source Control c. Pathway Interruption d. Housekeeping e. Scheduling

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs): are any carbon compounds that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate).

01 50 60- 2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Type A Finishes: Materials and finishes with potential for short-term levels of off-gassing from chemicals inherent in their manufacturing process, or which are applied in form requiring vehicles or carriers for spreading which release high levels of particulate matter in the process of installation and/ or curing. Including, but not limited to: 1. Composite wood products, specifically including particleboard from

which millwork, doors, or furniture may be fabricated. 2. Adhesives, sealants, and glazing compounds, specifically those with

petrochemical vehicles or carriers. 3. Wood preservatives, finishes, and paint. 4. Control and/ or expansion joint fillers. 5. Hard finishes requiring adhesive installation. 6. Gypsum board and associated finish processes.

C. Type B Finishes: Materials and finishes which are woven, fibrous, or porous in nature and tend to absorb chemicals off-gassed by Type A finishes or may be adversely affected by particulates. These materials become “skins” for deleterious substances which may be released much later, or collectors of contaminants that may promote subsequent bacterial growth. Including, but not limited to: 1. Carpet and padding. 2. Insulation exposed to air stream. 3. Acoustic ceiling materials. 4. Tectum acoustic wall panels. 5. Upholstered furnishings. 6. Materials that can be categorized as both Type A and Type B.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Indoor Air Quality: Minimize air concentrations of certain pollutants in completed project at time of Owner Occupancy. Maximum allowable indoor air concentrations of certain pollutants have been established. Concentrations must be at or below these standards prior to building acceptance.

B. Indoor Air Quality: Indoor occupied spaces of facility shall comply with the following standards: 1. Carbon Monoxide: Not to exceed 9 PPM + no greater than 2 PPM above

outdoor levels. 2. Carbon Dioxide: Not to exceed 800 PPM. 3. Airborne Mold and Mildew: Simultaneous indoor and outdoor readings.

4. Maximum Air Concentration Standards: Indoor room air concentration levels, emission rates and qualities of contaminants shall not exceed the following limits at time of substantial completion prior to occupancy of facility and installation of office furniture, occupants, and occupant activities.

MAXIMUM INDOOR AIR CONCENTRATION STANDARDS* Indoor Contaminants Maximum Air Concentration Levels Formaldehyde 50 parts per billion Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC) 500 micrograms per cubic meter 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PCH)** 6.5 micrograms per cubic meter Total Particulates (PM 10) 50 micrograms per cubic meter


Carbon Monoxide (CO) 9 parts per million and no greater than 2 parts per million above outdoor levels * All levels must be achieved prior to acceptance of the building. The levels

do not account for contributions from office furniture, occupants, and occupant activities.

** 4-phenylcyclohexene is an odorous contaminant constituent in carpets with styrene-butadienelatex rubber (SBR).

TLV-TWA Threshold Limit Value – Time Weighted Average MERV- Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (for filtration media) Or current indoor contaminant levels allowed by the LEED 2009 Rating program.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. A materials log book is required that includes MSDS sheets and additional

information on chemical content of selected materials, including Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) in terms of grams per liter (g/L) highlighted showing compliance with specification requirements. This log book shall be maintained by the contractor throughout the life of the project, shall be updated monthly to include any newly approved products, shall be available at all times to the Owner’s Representative, and shall be submitted at the conclusion of construction.

2. Indoor Air Quality Plan to outline measures to minimize contamination in the building during construction prior to Owner occupancy.

3. Provide photographs of protected materials, duct sealing and other measures taken at regular intervals throughout the period of construction.

4. Provide Cut Sheets of filtration media used during construction and installed immediately prior to occupancy highlighting MERV values. MERV values shall comply with the LEED 2009 rating system as noted in the applicable LEED for Schools Reference Guide.

5. Coordinate and incorporate all work described herein with construction schedules.

6. Passive Indoor Air Quality Test results. Based on results of passive indoor air quality testing, Owner reserves the right to require active indoor air quality testing.

C. Qualification Data: Indoor Air Quality Consultant’s qualification data.

D. If required, Active Indoor Air Quality Test results.


A. Indoor Air Quality Consultant Qualifications: Owner shall retain services of a recognized independent expert in testing of indoor air quality with access to proper testing equipment, with minimum of five years’ experience in testing of indoor air quality.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes, laws, rules, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction concerning indoor air quality.


1.8 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers shall meet or be within the VOC limits of the LEED 2009 Rating system as noted in the applicable LEED Reference Guide.

B. Paints and coatings shall meet or be within the VOC and chemical component limits of the LEED 2009 Rating system as noted in the applicable LEED Reference Guide.

C. Flooring Systems and adhesives shall meet or be within the limits of the LEED 2009 Rating system as noted in the applicable LEED Reference Guide.

D. Composite Wood- shall meet or be within the limits of the LEED 2009 Rating system as noted in the applicable LEED Reference Guide.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with requirements of Section 01351 –

SUSTAINABLE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS.

1.10 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. General: Sequence and schedule work in accordance with other sections as appropriate.

1.11 SYSTEM START UP A. Starting of Systems: Comply with Section 01 81 00 – Commissioning.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR AIR QUALITY TESTING EQUIPMENT A. Passive Testing Equipment: Passive monitoring test kit to measure formaldehyde

levels and total VOC levels, list three primary VOCs detected, and identify mold and other particulates collected. Include analysis and written report of tested air. 1. Acceptable Product: IAQ Test Kit, Air Quality Sciences, Atlanta, GA, 770-

933-0638.

B. Active Testing Equipment: As recommended and provided by Air Quality Testing Consultant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Indoor Air Quality Plan: Within 30 days of Notice to Proceed, prepare an Indoor Air Quality Plan tailored to the project, to ensure indoor air quality to comply with specified requirements, including but not limited to the following: 1. Identify Type A and Type B finishes in project. 2. Schedule and sequence installation of Type A and Type B finishes. 3. Provide tracking of submittals and MSDS sheets that relate to VOC

compliance. 4. Describe method, rate, and schedule of ventilation during construction

operations.


5. Schedule Indoor Air Quality testing conforming to the requirements of LEED credit EQ3.2 (option 2).

6. Schedule baseline IAQ testing after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using testing protocols consistent with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air and as additionally detailed in the LEED for Schools Reference Guide credit EQ3.2 (option 2). Construction Manager’s schedule should include this item in project schedule.

3.2 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

A. General: Schedule and sequence construction and provide ventilation during construction to maximize indoor air quality after occupancy. 1. Schedule and sequence application of finishes to:

a. Install Type A Finishes that off-gas significant quantities of deleterious material during curing.

b. Ensure dissipation of emissions from Type A finishes before installation of Type B Finishes.

c. Install Type B Finishes (absorptive materials). d. Avoid absorption of Type A Finish emissions by Type B Finishes. e. All absorptive materials either stored on site or installed shall be

protected from moisture throughout the course of construction. f. Avoid subsequent release of unwanted substances in indoor spaces

and mechanical systems after facility occupancy.

B. Temporary Heating and Ventilating: Comply with Section 01 50 00 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

3.3 CONTROL MEASURES

A. HVAC PROTECTION: All HVAC equipment shall be protected from collecting not only dust but also odors which can “stick” to porous materials in the system and later be released. Specific HVAC protection requirements generally apply to either the return side, central filtration, or supply side of the system. Identify in the Indoor Air Quality plan the methods to be utilized for HVAC protection. 1. Return Side: The return side of an HVAC system is, by definition, under

negative pressure and thus capable of drawing in nearby construction dust and odor. HVAC shall not be used by the Contractor during construction period. a. The entire system shall be shut down during all construction

activities unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner’s Representative and the Commissioning Agent.

b. The system shall be isolated from the surrounding environment as much as possible (e.g., all tiles in place for a ceiling plenum, duct and air handler leaks repaired) to prevent induction of pollutants.

c. All return system openings in (or immediately adjacent to) the construction area shall be sealed with plastic.

d. The mechanical room shall not be used to store construction or waste materials.

2. Central Filtration: Where major dust loading is expected to impact operating HVAC systems, upgrade filter efficiency. For example, filters with 60 to 80% dust spot efficiency may provide increased protection, if minimum airflow can be maintained. Where other control options for construction related odors are not deemed effective, provide filtration with media such as activated charcoal or potassium permanganate.


3. Supply Side: Diffusers, VAV boxes, and ducts may be adequately protected in most cases where the above measures are implemented. When the system is off for the duration of construction, diffusers and window units shall also be sealed in plastic for further protection. Ducts, diffusers, and window units shall be inspected upon completion of the work for the amount of deposited particulate resent and cleaned. If significant dust deposits are observed in the system during construction, some particulate discharge can be expected during start-up. When such a discharge is only minor, delaying occupancy only long enough to clean up the dust. In more severe cases, install temporary coarse filters on diffusers or clean the ducts. The condition of the main filters shall be checked whenever visible particulates are discharged from the system or as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

4. Duct Cleaning: Clean the ducts and associated equipment during construction when the system becomes contaminated due to inadequate protection during the construction process. Provide specialized equipment and professional expertise as needed to ensure that dust is effectively removed and contained to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and the Commissioning Agent. The sequence in which duct cleaning occurs in the overall construction process needs to be carefully considered to avoid recontamination.

B. SOURCE CONTROL: The most effective type of pollution control is generally at the source. A variety of options are available depending on the type of products and equipment needed for the construction project. When any of the following control options appear to be feasible, costs should be compared to other measures (pathway interruption, intensified housekeeping, and scheduling changes) during the construction project. Although solvent content is often reduced, air quality advantages may be limited (e.g., most paints and adhesives stop significant off-gassing within a few weeks anyway). Product emission data is available from manufacturers and can be stated either as total VOCs or by specific compound. The time period of the testing is important (emissions should be expected to decline). Identify in the Indoor Air Quality plan source control methods to be utilized. 1. Modifying Equipment Operation: Use of equipment may need to be

restricted in order to meet IAQ objectives. This will involve changing operating procedures. Examples of such controls include: a. Restricting traffic volume or prohibiting idling of motor vehicles

where emissions could be drawn into occupied areas. b. Switching from diesel to bottled gas for equipment such as

generators of forklifts (emissions are cleaner but still potentially harmful under some circumstances). Use of electric forklifts and other equipment shall be considered when feasible, since they do not burn fossil fuels, thus eliminating exposure to combustion gas emissions.

c. Switching equipment such as chain saws from gasoline-powered to electric (job may take longer due to reduced performance).

d. Cycling equipment off when not needed. 2. Changing Work Practices:

a. For some tasks (e.g., paint stripping) provide techniques which produce less airborne dust.

b. Provide painting techniques, which release less odor. c. Provide cleaning practices which raise less dust (see Section

3.03.D.3). 3. Local Exhaust: Pollution sources shall be directly exhausted to the outside.

This shall be done through a portable exhaust fan vented to the outside and attached to the work site by flex duct. Depending on the nature of the material and the location of the exhaust, special filtration of the exhaust


may or may not be necessary. Any emissions to the outside must be in compliance with applicable regulations and shall be directed well away from intakes.

4. Air cleaning: Where exhaust is not feasible, local recirculation of air through a portable air cleaner shall be provided. The type of filter shall be suitable for the material being controlled (e.g., charcoal or potassium permanganate for many odors, a moderate to high efficiency filter for dust).

5. Cover or Seal: VOC emissions are a result of evaporation from an exposed surface. Reducing the exposed surface reduces emissions. Provide the following measure including but not limited to: a. An enclosed tanker or closed/ hooded kettle for roofing. b. Containers of wet products shall be kept closed as much as

possible. c. Waste materials which can release odor or dust shall be covered or

sealed. d. A surface which is a persistent odor source shall be controlled by

applying a sealer.

C. PATHWAY INTERUPTION: Provide methods that prevent and interrupt potential contaminant pathways and air movement from the work site. Identify in the Indoor Air Quality plan major pathways for the project. In the Indoor Air Quality Plan utilize the following five different factors to achieve environmental control: 1. Depressurize the work area. This shall be accomplished by adjusting the

balance of the HVAC and exhaust systems or installing portable exhaust fans. Construction worker comfort may have to be a secondary consideration when cutting off conditioned air to the work site becomes necessary to help establish negative pressure environment. Some ventilation of the construction space will still be needed to dilute contaminants. This may be provided by air drawn into the work site from adjoining areas. Air exhausted to achieve negative pressure may or may not need to be filtered, depending on the nature of the materials, location of exhaust, and any applicable regulations. Care must be taken not to exhaust air where it can be drawn back into the building. When increasing the amount of air supplied to the space, it is imperative that the HVAC system itself remains protected from construction emissions. As a general rule, the work site shall be exhausted at a rate at least 10% greater than the rate of supply in order to maintain an effective negative pressure.

2. Pressurize occupied space. Increasing supply air and or reducing return exhaust air in the building during construction will help exclude airborne dust and odors. While HVAC systems generally shut down at night, consideration shall be given to temporarily extending the fan schedule. Overnight pressurization could help prevent dust and odor from migrating into the space. When increasing the amount of air supplied to the occupied space, it is imperative that the HVAC system itself remains protected from construction emissions. Any temporary rebalancing during construction should be carefully planned with the Commissioning Agent and executed.

3. Erect barriers to contain construction area. Barriers can range from simple dust curtains for jobs generating only minor amounts of nuisance dust to a continuous plastic seal around the site, allowing for only the controlled inflow of make-up air. For non-asbestos projects, the extent of the barrier should be based on the materials involved and the implications of dust and odor escaping from the site. Id such a release is not considered a hazard and can be easily corrected by housekeeping, then a partial barrier or sealing of holes may be sufficient. Where no odor or dust can be tolerated outside the work area, a barrier approaching that required for asbestos projects may be needed. Barriers


shall be designed in conjunction with favorable pressure differentials. Pressurization can only be achieved with a real partition between areas with pressure differences. In general, full containment of a work site with barriers, capping of return air ducts, and the application of negative pressure may be needed for spaces undergoing significant construction activities, and requirements shall be as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

4. Relocate pollutant sources. When project equipment of staging area coincide with critical airflow pathways equipment shall be moved to a more favorable location in regard to air quality. For example, in a roofing job, tar tankers shall be located as far away from intakes as possible. Special care shall be taken to protect mechanical rooms with air handling equipment (e.g., store construction products and waste materials elsewhere).

5. Temporarily seal the building. Where construction emissions are occurring on the roof or adjacent to a building, contaminants may be drawn in through the outside air intake or (if the building is under negative pressure) other entries or cracks. If contaminant levels are unacceptable then the Owner’s Representative or the Commissioning Agent shall direct the Contractor to seal the intake dampers. Special activities in the building that require outside air for dilution shall be temporarily discontinued. Control of the outside source may also necessitate closing or sealing exterior doors, the top of the elevator shaft, etc.

D. HOUSEKEEPING: As dust accumulates at a construction site, it will become airborne when disturbed by nearby activity. Similarly, spills or excess applications of products containing solvents will increase odors at a construction site. Finally, leaving the work site wet or even just damp for more than a day could result in the growth of mold and bacteria. Attention to site cleaning is, therefore, important to maintaining IAQ during construction. In the Indoor Air Quality Plan utilize these specific actions in regard to controlling contaminants at the work site including but not limited to: 1. Suppressing dust with wetting agents or sweeping compounds. 2. Increasing the cleaning frequency for dust. 3. Switching to a more efficient dust collection method (e.g., a damp rag, wet

mop, or vacuum equipped with a high efficiency particulate filter or wet scrubber will discharge less material back into the air than conventional vacuuming, sweeping, or dusting).

4. Ensuring that all surfaces (including higher ledges, behind furniture, and inside mechanical equipment) are kept clean.

5. Removing spills or excess applications of solvent-containing products as soon as possible. Care shall be taken as to the selection of spot removers and cleaning agents (in general, products should be low odor emitters or used after hours with sufficient ventilation).

6. Removing accumulated water and keeping work areas as dry as possible (using dehumidification if necessary).

7. Vacuuming with HEPA filtered vacuum cleaners prevents aerolization of settled dust.

8. Protecting porous materials such as insulation from exposure to moisture (note: items which become wet/ damp will be replaced)

E. SCHEDULING: In the Indoor Air Quality Plan utilize construction sequencing to reduce absorption of VOCs by materials that act as sinks or contaminant sources. Complete application of wet and odor-emitting materials such as paints, sealants, and coatings before installing sink materials such as ceiling tiles, carpets, insulation, gypsum products, and fabric covered furnishings are installed. Materials directly exposed to moisture through precipitation, plumbing leaks, or condensation from HVAC system are susceptible to microbial contamination and


shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall conduct activities with a high pollution potential during off hours. For example, if roofing emissions cannot be excluded from the building, the work shall be performed on an evening shift. Similarly, any work which disrupts the HVAC system or introduces odor into the system shall be done during unoccupied hours when possible. Where off-gassing odors are a major concern, work may have to be completed at the beginning of a weekend in order to allow new products time to air out sufficiently. Where occupants cannot be relocated, starting time may need to be delayed until late morning in order to accommodate clean-up of late night construction work. The above measures assume that construction work is being rescheduled in order to avoid potentially harmful exposure to the general population.

F. At the end of the construction and prior to Owner occupancy, conduct air quality testing in full compliance with the requirements of LEED credit EQ3.2 (option 2).

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Indoor Air Quality Testing Conditions: Facility has achieved Substantial Completion except for indoor air quality testing. 1. Final Cleaning: Completed. 2. HVAC Systems: Started, tested, balanced, Commissioned, cleaned,

construction filters replaced and systems operating normally as specified. 3. Facility: Not occupied and Owner provided furnishings and equipment not

yet installed.

B. BASELINE IAQ TESTING: 1. HVAC System Verification: To assure compliance with recognized

standards for indoor air quality including ASHRAE Standard 62-1999 or latest version, the Owner’s independent testing and balancing agency shall verify the performance of each HVAC system including but not limited to space temperature and space humidity uniformity, outside air quantity, filter installation, drain pan operation, and any obvious contamination sources.

2. Indoor Air Quality Testing: Upon verification of HVAC system operation, the independent Air Quality Testing Consultant shall test levels of indoor air contaminants for compliance with specified requirements. a. A Test plan shall be submitted for the approval of the Owner’s

representative. The plan shall specify procedures, times, instrumentation, and sampling methods that will be employed.

b. The number of sampling locations will vary depending upon the size of

the building. Contaminant levels are to be measured in an area agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner’s Representative.

c. Collect air samples on three consecutive days during normal school hours (between the hours of 8:00 am and 3:00 pm) with building operating at normal HVAC rates. Average the results of each three-day tests cycle to determine compliance or non-compliance of indoor air quality for each air-handling zone tested.

d. Sample and record outside air levels of formaldehyde and contaminants at outside air intake of each respective air handling unit simultaneously with indoor tests to establish basis of comparison for these contaminant levels. Indoor testing will be done in the breathing zone; between 4’ and 7’ from the floor.


e. Acceptance of respective portions of buildings by the Owner is subject to compliance with specified limits of indoor air quality contaminant levels.

C. Passive Indoor Air Quality Testing: Provide and install Passive Indoor Air Quality Testing Equipment in space to be occupied as directed by Owner’s Representative and in accordance with testing equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Conduct passive test for 7 days with facility operating at specified HVAC

rates and conditions. 2. Include analysis and written report of tested air by testing equipment

provider. 3. If initial test results do not indicate compliance with specified indoor air

quality standards, provide additional ventilation and take additional measures as required and accepted by Owner to achieve compliance.

4. Cost of Subsequent Passive Testing required because of failure to comply with specified standards shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Active Indoor Air Quality Testing: After results of passive testing have been submitted, Owner retains the right to require active indoor air quality testing by Air Quality Testing Consultant. 1. Testing: As determined by Owner based on recommendations of Air

Quality Testing Consultant. 2. Cost of Initial Active Testing: By Owner 3. If initial test results do not indicate compliance with specified indoor air

quality standards, provide additional ventilation and take additional measures as required and accepted by Air Quality Testing Consultant to achieve compliance.

4. Cost of Subsequent Active Testing Required Because of Failure to Comply with Specified Standards: By Contractor.

E. Compliance: Indoor air quality shall conform to paragraph 1.06 above.

F. Test Reports: Prepare test reports showing the results and location of each test, a summary of the HVAC operating conditions, a listing of any discrepancies and recommendations for corrective actions, if required.

1. Include certification of test equipment calibration with each test report.

G. If any test fails the standard, the Contractor is responsible to ventilate the building with 100% outside air until the building passes both air quality tests and duct inspections. Retesting shall be performed at no additional expense to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 54 60 - SAFETY AND HEALTH

WCPS: North High SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 54 60-1 - Health Suite Expansion

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. OSHA General Industry Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910), Publication V2206; OSHA Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926).

2. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR, Part 61). 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Final Rule (40 CFR Part 761) dated July

17, 1985.

C. Federal Standard (Fed. Std): 1. 313A Material Safety Data Sheets, Preparation and the Submission of.

D. Maryland Standards: 1. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) Supplement to OSHA.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION

A. This section is applicable to all work.

B. A Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan is to be developed by the Contractor and shall be adhered to in the execution of the work. The Plan shall include an overview of procedures, reports and samples of forms and documents for the plan. The contractor shall provide a copy of his safety plan to the Construction Manager.

1.4 DEFINITION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Refer to hazardous and toxic materials/substances included in Subparts H and Z of 29 CFR 1910; and to others as additionally defined in Fed. Std. 313. Those most commonly encountered include asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB’s), explosives, and radioactive material, but many include others. The most likely products to contain asbestos are sprayed-on fireproofing, insulation, boiler lagging, pipe covering and likely products to contain PCB’s are transformers, capacitors, voltage regulators, and oil switches.


A. Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and his/her representative(s) prior to the start of work under this contract for the purpose or reviewing the Contractor’s safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent to the work to be performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss in detail, the measures he/she intends to take in order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated with the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by the Owner, this meeting may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to

01 54 60-2 SAFETY AND HEALTH WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

take place prior to start of work under this contract. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the work and the potential inherent hazards. The Contractor’s principal on-site representative(s), the general superintendent and his/her safety representative(s) shall attend this meeting.

B. Compliance With Regulations: All work, including contact with and handling of hazardous

materials, the disturbance or dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or the disposal of hazardous materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1926/1910 and 40 CFR 761. All work shall comply with applicable state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply.

C. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for

compliance with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during the execution of work, and shall hold the Owner harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her employees or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or death.

D. Contractor shall conduct activities in a safe manner and shall be responsible for

observing the safety regulations of MOSH, OSHA, and local life safety agencies. 1. Comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of

the governing authorities having jurisdiction for safety of persons and property to protect them from damage, injury, or loss.

2. Erect and maintain as required by conditions and progress of the work all necessary safeguards for safety and protection, including fences, railings, barricades, lighting, posting of danger signs, and other warnings against hazards.

3. Be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with this project.

4. Contractor shall immediately provide and maintain properly secured and labeled temporary protective covers over all deck and roof penetrations and openings until permanent work is installed.

E. Contractor shall furnish any and all relevant MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets)

information as related to their scope of work prior to starting. If not on file, this Contractor will not be permitted to work. Resulting delays and associated cost shall be the responsibility of this Contractor including costs incurred by other parties.

F. The General Contractor will require all contractors to complete a “Permit to Work”

for high risk activities such as: crane erection and dismantling, entry into confined spaces, hot works, works on or adjacent to energized systems, and work on occupied premises. The Contractor shall present a Job Hazard Analysis and safe work method statement prior to the issuance of a Permit to Work. These items will be required in the project specific safety plan required for all Contractors.

G. All Contractors acknowledge that safety harnesses must only be used as a secondary

means of fall prevention / fall restraint or as a last resort when no other practical means are available to provide a safe method of work. Passive fall protection such as safe work platforms, scaffolding, robust perimeter protection, and Mobile Elevated Work Platforms must be used wherever possible to prevent the use of safety harnesses as a primary means of fall protection.

H. Contractor shall conduct weekly tool box safety meetings and shall require all of their

employees working on the site to attend. Copies of the minutes and attendance sheet must be submitted to the General Contractor weekly.

WCPS – ‘West City’ SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 54 60-3 Elementary School

I. All Contractors shall provide proof of training and certification for all employees assigned to this project. Training must be relevant and updated for the scope of work or equipment being performed or operated by the individual tradesmen.

J. Contractor acknowledges that all employees are required to wear shirts, work shoes,

and hard hats, safety glasses and high visibility vest at all times while on site. No shorts will be permitted.

K. Contractors shall install and maintain safety fence at all open excavations that they

create. L. Contractor shall exercise due care and shall be responsible for all material and

accessories required for the safe rigging and handling of material and equipment so as to provide for the safety of persons and property, the work of other trades, and material and equipment stored at the jobsite.

M. Contractor shall replace any safety handrails and barriers taken down or removed

during the process of their work. 1.6 SUBMITTAL

A. Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan: The Contractor’s Safety and Health Plan is to be submitted for approval during the initial submittals for the project.

B. Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractors or subcontractors

submit to their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded to the Owner as soon as possible, but in no event later than seven (7) calendar days after the day the accident occurred.

C. Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off-site, submit copies of permits from

applicable, Federal, state or municipal authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been disposed of as per regulations.

D. Other Submittals: If agreed to in writing at the safety meeting, other submittals shall be

required. One such submittal which may be included is a plan of action for handling hazardous materials, which shall contain the following: 1. Number, type, and experience of employees to be used for the work 2. Description of how applicable safety and health regulations and standards are to be met. 3. Type of protective equipment and work procedures to be used 4. Emergency procedures for accidental spills or exposures 5. Procedures for disposing of or storing the toxic/hazardous materials 6. Identification of possible hazards, problems, and proposed control mechanisms 7. Protection of public or others not related to the operation 8. Interfacing and control of subcontractors, if any 9. Identifications of any required analyses, test demonstrations, and validation requirements. 10. Method of certification for compliance

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar items used by the Contractor in the execution of work shall comply with the applicable regulations.

01 54 60-4 SAFETY AND HEALTH WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Material Safety Data Sheets: Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall be kept on file in the Contractor’s Field Office, and made available for review when required.

3.2 SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN

A. Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan: Post copies of the plan in conspicuous location so that all personnel may be made aware of the safety procedures at all times.

3.3 STOP WORK ORDERS

A. When the Contractors or his/her subcontractors are notified by the Owner/Architect of any noncompliance with the provisions of the contract and the action(s) to be taken, the Contractor shall immediately, if so directed, or within 48 hours after receipt of a notice of violation correct the unsafe or unhealthy condition. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or any part of the work being performed may be stopped by the Owner/Architect with a “Stop Work Order”. When, in the opinion of the Owner/Architect, satisfactory corrective action has been taken to correct the unsafe and unhealthy condition, a start order will be given immediately. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extension of time or compensation for damages by reason of or in connection with such work stoppage.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, or damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public shall include all persons not employed by the Prime Contractor’s or a subcontractor working under his/her direction.

B. Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner

likely to present a hazard to the public by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous qualities is prohibited.

C. Public Thoroughfare: When work is to be performed over a public thoroughfare such as a

sidewalk, the thoroughfare shall be closed, if possible, or other precautions taken such as the installation of screen or barricades. When the exposure to heavy falling objects exists, as during the erection of building walls, special protection of the type detailed in 29 CFR 1910/1926 shall be provided.

D. Fences and barricades shall be removed upon completion of the project, in accordance with

local ordinance and to the satisfaction of the General Contractor. END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

WCPS: North High PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion


A. Products.

B. Product delivery requirements.

C. Product storage and handling requirements.

D. Product options.

E. Product substitution procedures. 1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. 1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site

storage or protection. Off-site storage must be located within the State of Maryland.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent

mixing with foreign matter.

H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

01 60 00-2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

J. Contractor must be on site to receive and unload all construction deliveries. WCPS staff is not responsible for receiving any deliveries for this construction project.

K. Limiting Exposure of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and

protection methods, supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include where applicable (but not by way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, improper shipping/handling, theft and vandalism.

L. During handling and installation of work at project site, clean and protect work in

progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure work is free from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period.

M. Off Site Stored Materials shall be in accordance with Section 01 27 00.

1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: products of one of

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article.

1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. If the specification has listed three (3) or more product lines, substitutions will not be considered. Where less than three (3) manufacturers or products are listed in the Specifications, or the specification lists “Approved Equal” as an acceptable product, the burden of proof of equivalency rests with the Contractor and evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and approved by Architect with final approval to be determined by the Owner. Criteria includes but is not limited to performance, materials, craftsmanship, quality control, certification procedures or requirements, warranty, installation procedures, etc..

WCPS – ‘West City’ PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-3 Elementary School

B. Any proposed substitution, or proposed equal product, must be submitted to the Architect for review, 10 days prior to the bid date. After the receipt of bids and award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect are under no obligation to review or approve requests for substitution or equal products that were not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. The Owner reserves the right to request a substitution at any time in the project.

C. Substitutions may be considered during construction when a product becomes

unavailable through no fault of Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. During construction, substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals, without prior separate written request, or approval, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three (3) copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit

each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to

proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or

reject request. 4. If a substitution is found acceptable, the Contractor shall be responsible for

coordination among the trades. Any redesign by the Architect/Engineer required by the accepted substitution, will be completed on a time and material basis with the cost submitted to the Owner and credited to the Owner-Contractor contract sum.

G. If a substitution is requested during construction, and the original specified product is available, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may request the Contractor to submit substantiating purchase cost data for review. 1. If it is found that the Contractor is in receipt of a savings to his contract by

the substituted product, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may request that the credit be passed through to the Owner and credited to the Owner-Contractor contract sum.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

01 60 00-4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION DATE OF REQUEST: ___________________________________________________________ PROJECT: WCPS: North Hagerstown High School – Health Suite Expansion CONTRACTOR: ____________________________________________________________ TELEPHONE NO: ____________________________________________________________

FACSIMILE NO: ____________________________________________________________ CONTACT: ____________________________________________________________ CONTRACT PACKAGE: ________________________________________________________ 1. Item for which substitution is being requested:

________________________________________________________________________ 2. Reference Specification Section: _____________________________________________ 3. Reference Drawing: _______________________________________________________

4. Reason for Substitution Request :_____________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________ 5. Product Comparison:

Submit three copies of shop drawing, product data, color samples, utility requirements and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence.

a. ______ Data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents.

b. ______ Product identification, manufacturer’s name, address and telephone number.

c. ______ Manufacturer’s literature, warranty.

d. ______ Full color selection, showing colors Architect may select without additional cost.

e. ______ Samples

f. ______ Warranty

g. ______ References of product use.

h. ______ Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified.

Highlight all differences from specified item.

i. ______ All items listed Section 01 60 00-1.6.

j. ______ Cover letter stating benefits or equality of substitution and reason for substitution request.

6. If request is being submitted after the receipt of bids, attach price quotations of specified

product and substituted products.

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

WCPS: North High EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion


A. Closeout procedures.

B. Final cleaning.

C. Demonstration and instructions.

D. Protecting installed construction.

E. Project record documents.

F. Operation and maintenance data.

G. Manual for materials and finishes.

H. Spare parts and maintenance products.

I. Product warranties and product bonds. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has

been inspected by the Contractor and governing agencies, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review. 1. The contractor shall then request in writing a “closeout inspection” by the

Owner/Architect and Consultants. 2. Prior to the start of the closeout inspection, the Contractor shall have performed

final cleaning of the area in accordance with Article 1.3 of this section. 3. Upon completion of the closeout inspection, the Owner/Architect/Engineer

shall compile their findings and comments into one (1) document and submit it to the Contractor for corrective work. a. If all parties are in agreement, this closeout inspection shall constitute

“substantial completion” to that portion of building or site inspected. b. If the area inspected is found unacceptable by the Owner/

Architect/Engineer, reinspection fees will be charged to the Contractor on a time and material basis.

B. Provide submittals to Owner/Architect/Engineer required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

01 73 00-2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.3 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning by a cleaning contractor with minimum five (5) years documented experience prior to final project assessment.

B. Provide products and manufacturers in accordance with project specifications. All

cleaning products must be documented as having Zero (0) VOC content.

C. Clean surfaces free of dust, stains, labels, and similar noticeable distracting substances. The areas and items noted show general areas of work and shall not serve to limit this scope of work: 1. Interior and exterior glass/glazing systems, including window sills and ledges 2. All walls, floors, and exposed structural surfaces in all rooms, including

stairwells and mechanical/electrical rooms and elevator cab. 3. All wall tile and wall base 4. All light fixtures, including lenses. 5. Grilles and diffusers 6. Doors, frames and hardware 7. Lockers, fire extinguishers and cabinets, railings, and signage 8. Dust and wipe down mechanical and electrical equipment including

transformers and electrical panels in electrical and mechanical rooms and the mechanical penthouse.

9. Clean all equipment, devices, and surfaces in the MDF and IDF Rooms using appropriate methods for this specialty electronic equipment.

10. Dust and wipe down Casework, millwork and shelving both inside and out. Include both vertical and horizontal plastic laminate surfaces.

11. Electrical wall devices: outlets, light switches, cover plates, etc. 12. Restrooms – clean and disinfect all accessories, mirrors, surfaces, plumbing

fixtures, wall tile, and floor tile. 13. Kitchen – clean and disinfect all accessories, surfaces, fixtures, wall tile, floor

tile, etc. to Health Department standards 14. Dust and wipe down all marker boards, tack boards, tack strips and display

cases, including frames and ledges.

D. Use cleaners and methods that will not damage, stain, scratch, discolor, dull, etc. surfaces in any way.

E. Remove temporary protection.

F. Vacuum all carpeted surfaces.

G. All areas will be subject to a final inspection and acceptance by the Owner.

H. VCT shall be cleaned according to tile manufacturer’s instructions for new VCT installation. Mop clean only avoiding excess water on floors. ALL SRTIPPING AND WAXING WORK IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SCOPE AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY OWNER.


I. Replace filters of operating equipment.

J. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

K. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

L. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site. 1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks after to date of Substantial Completion.

B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct in classroom environment located at site

and instructed by qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project.

C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for

other season within six (6) months.

D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,

maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment designated location.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need

for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

G. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections.

H. Each demonstration shall be digitally filmed by a professional camera crew.

1. The filmed demonstration shall be professionally edited with titles, subtitles and sound in a manner that clearly illustrates the operation and maintenance of the equipment or systems being demonstrated.

2. Each piece of equipment or systems that has been filmed shall be submitted on a DVD format that can be operated by the Owner’s standard equipment.

3. Separate DVD’s shall be provided for each piece of equipment or system demonstrated with title of demonstration, date of demonstration, name of facility, name of Owner, General Contractor, Subcontractor, Equipment or System Manufacturer, Model Number of Equipment or System, Name of Consultant and Architect.

4. Provide two (2) copies of each DVD in a case or in an indexed “D” ring binder labeled in accordance to Article 1.7.

1.5 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.


B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of

openings.

D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. 7. Contractor Request for Information (RFI) and Architectural Supplemental

Instructions (ASI).

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.


1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring, 3 inch binders with durable clear view plastic cloth covers. All binders shall be the same color

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically

organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger

drawings to size of text pages.

E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by specification

division and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended

cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Air and water balance reports. b. Certificates. c. Originals of warranties and bonds

F. Submit one (1) draft copy for Architect/Engineer review at 50% project time

completion. 1. Upon completion of review by the Architect/Engineer, the copy shall be

returned to the Contractor for corrections.

G. Upon completion of corrections, the Contractor shall submit three (3) final copies of the Operation and Maintenance Data to the Architect/Engineer.

1.8 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.


B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.

C. Submit one (1) draft copy at 50% project completion inspection. Draft copy be

reviewed and returned, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission.

D. Submit three (3) sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final

completion.

E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for

cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing

applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space

for insertion of data. 1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Package, label, and furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

C. Provide transmittals of materials turned over to owner, including quantity and descriptions for Owner sign off.

1.10 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS

A. Warranty Duration: Refer to Section 00 72 14 for overall warranty duration and individual sections for specific product warranty durations.

B. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in triplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten (10) calendar days after completion of applicable item of work. The effective date of the warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion.

C. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from

subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

D. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.


E. Co-execute submittals when required.

F. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D size ring binder with durable plastic clear view cover.

G. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

H. Time Of Submittals:

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten (10) calendar days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within ten (10) calendar days prior to Closeout Inspection, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten (10) calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 74 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 01 74 00 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation and submittal. B. Time and schedule of submittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 02 00 - Invitation to Bid - Instructions to Bidders: Bid Bonds. B. Section 00 30 00 - General Conditions: Performance Bond and Labor and Material

Payment Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work.

C. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. D. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Bind in commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three “D”-ring ‘clear-vue’ binders with

hardback, cleanable, and transparent plastic covers and side binder. B. Label cover and side of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND

BONDS, with title and date of Project; name, project number; address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of Architect.

C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project

Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item.

D. Directory: Provide a directory which indicates names, addresses and telephone/fax

numbers of Owners, Consultants, General Contractors, Subcontractors, and Major Suppliers. Include name of contact person for each entry.

E. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents

listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Sub- contractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of

responsible principal. Include information regarding maintenance and operations of equipment and or materials as may be required by the specifications or manufacturer.

1.04 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required.

01 74 00-2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Provide draft copy of warranties and bonds for review by consultant no later than 50%

project time completion. C. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment. D. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,

submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 10

SPECIALTIES



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 10 50-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 10 10 50 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS


A. Porcelain enamel markerboards. B. Tackboards. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 04 30 00 - Unit Masonry System: Placement of concealed supports in wall

construction. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood grounds. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. C. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

Commercial Quality. D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. E. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. F. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. G. ASTM C208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative.

H. ASTM C543 - Slate Blackboards. I. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. FS CCC-W-408 - Wall Covering, Vinyl-Coated. K. FS L-P-1040 - Plastic Sheets and Strips, Polyvinyl Fluoride. L. HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. M. NPA A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. N. PEI (Porcelain Enamel Institute) - Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel

Chalkboards. O. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

10 10 50-2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor

details. C. Product Data: Provide data on markerboards, tackboards, tackboard surface covering,

and trim and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating materials and finish,

color and texture of markerboard, tackboard, and tackboard surfacing. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, and stain removal. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating for vinyl fabric covered

tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Refer to drawings for schedule and location. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01 74 00. B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to

cleaning, crazing or cracking, or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Claridge – Series 3 (Basis of Design)

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Polyvision. 2. Ghent. 3. Newline Products Inc.

WCPS: North High VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 10 50-3 - Health Suite Expansion

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.02 MARKERBOARD MATERIAL

A. Markerboards shall be equal to Claridge LCS II 24 gauge porcelain enamel steel with #75 low gloss white writing surface to be used with LCS markers and finish firing not to exceed 1000 degrees F.

B. Core Material: Medium density fiberboard (MDF)

C. Foil Backing: Aluminum Sheet, 0.015 inch thick.

2.03 TACKBOARD MATERIAL A. Equal to Claridge 1100 Series 1/4" self-healing burlap backed cork on 1/4" hardboard

backing, color as selected. 2.04 FRAME MATERIALS A. Frame and Chalkrail: Aluminum extrusions, ASTM B221, 6061 alloy, T5 temper. Equal

to Claridge 271A Chalkrail with No. 273A frame trim. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer.

B. Cleaning Instruction Plate: Provide instructions for cleaning on a metal plate fastened to perimeter frame near chalkrail.

2.06 FABRICATION - MARKERBOARDS A. Face Sheet: Porcelain enamel steel. B. Writing Surface: LCS II #75 low gloss white. C. Core: 7/16" Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) D. Backing Surface: Aluminum sheet, 0.015 inch thick. E. Splice Joint: Concealed spline of sheet steel. 2.07 FABRICATION - TACKBOARDS

A. Modular Tackboard System (Equal to Claridge 1100 Series)

1. Outer Facing: 1/4" self-healing burlap backed cork, color as selected. 2. Backing Surface: 1/4" hardboard

2.08 FABRICATION - FRAME AND TRIM A. Aluminum Frame: Series 3 profile; concealed fasteners, over markerboard. B. Aluminum Chalkrail: one piece full length of chalkboard, closed ends; concealed

fasteners. Chalkrail shall be provided at chalkboards and markerboards. 1. No chalkrail required in gymnasium.

10 10 50-4 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

2.09 FINISHES A. Porcelain Enamel: Glass fibered enamel, baked to vitreous surfaces; Porcelain Enamel

Institute Type A; color as selected. B. Tackboard Surface: 1/4" self-healing burlap backed Claridge cork. C. Aluminum Frame, Chalkrail, and Accessories: Anodized to clear finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are

as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive applied type. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. B. Establish top of chalk rail at 30 inches above finished floor. C. Secure units level and plumb. D. Markerboards: Butt panels tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00. B. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cover markerboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. D. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High SIGNAGE 10 44 10-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 10 44 10 - SIGNAGE


A. Interior Signage 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, and overall dimensions of each engraved sign.

C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

D. Submit two samples illustrating full size sample sign, of type, style and color specified

including method of attachment.

E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

F. Include installation template and hardware. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

C. Package signs, labeled in name groups. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70ΕF. Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Specified Interior Signage Manufacturer: 1. ASI Modulex, Baltimore, MD Impressions Plaques System with feature to allow

installation of teacher's names and other modifications as detailed.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers 1. American Graphics Inc. - Montgomery, Alabama 2. Spanger.

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

10 44 10-2 SIGNAGE WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

D. Interior Signage (Raised Copy Signs): 1/16 inch clear matte acrylic that is sub-surface screen printed with a background color prior to being laminated to an opaque 1/4 inch base plate of either white or black acrylic and has a 1/16 inch thickness acrylic letter chemically welded to the front surface of the plaque. Copy shall be a minimum 5/8 inch high and comply with ANSI 117.1-4.30. 1. Doors not scheduled for signage per the door schedule shall receive a 2 x 3 inch

sign indicating door number, as indicated by the Owner, to be located on door frame head, directly over the door latch.

2. Where signage is mounted on glazing, provide blank panel of same size and color to conceal adhesive mounting from interior.

E. Lettering:

1. Size and Style: Height of letter and numerals shall be as detailed, but not less then 5/8 inch; upper case text style as selected from ADA compliant test styles.

2. Colors: as selected.

F. Accessories 1. Tape Adhesive: silastic adhesive mounting for interior signage.


A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install signs after doors and surfaces are finished, in locations scheduled.

C. Locate signs adjacent to doors on wall, surface mounted in accordance with ANSI A117.1.

D. Clean and polish.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Provide signage as indicated on the door schedule and as detailed. Note that ALL doors receive signage indicating the door number. However, doors that receive both numerals and signage shall be a combined sign as detailed.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 10 80 00 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES


A. Toilet and washroom accessories.

B. Grab bars.

C. Detention grab bars. D. Electric hand dryers.


A. Section 06 11 40 – Wood Blocking and Curbing: Concealed Wood Blocking. B. Section 09 30 70 - Wall Tile: Ceramic accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped.

B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General

Service.

E. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.

F. ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

G. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,

attachment methods.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

10 80 00-2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data and instructed by the manufacturer.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.

B. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Bobrick, Product as specified.

B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. Bradley. 3. Parker.

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366.

B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.

C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.

D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, and security type.

E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth.

B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.

C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment

flanges. Form bar with 1 1/2 inches clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces.

WCPS: North High TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.04 KEYING

A. Supply six (6) keys for each accessory to Owner.

B. Master key all accessories.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.

B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.

C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats electrostatic baked enamel.

D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin finish.

E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.

F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.


A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.

B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer.

C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ANSI A117.1.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

10 80 00-4 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

3.04 SCHEDULE (See drawings for locations).

1. Toilet Paper Dispenser -Adult Kimberly-Clark 09602 (furnished by Owner, Installed by Contractor)

2. Mirror (18” x 30”) Bobrick B-165 18" x 30" 3. Paper Towel Dispenser Georgia-Pacific HV200K (furnished by

Owner, Installed by Contractor) 4. Soap Dispenser Kimberly-Clark 92145 (furnished by

Owner, Installed by Contractor) 5. Grab Bars (Toilet): a. 36” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806-36 b. 42” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806-42 6. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Bobrick B-271 7. Robe Hook Bobrick B-76717

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 12

FURNISHINGS



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 51 20-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 12 51 20 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wall opening head support blocking.

1.03 REFERENCES A. FS AA-V-00200 - Venetian Blinds. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at window openings, manual control of

raising and lowering by cord blade angle adjustable by control wand. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, tolerances required, installation of blind

at window opening, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. D. Submit product data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, and operating

features. E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. F. Submit two samples 18 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord rod

type and color. G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

Section with ten (10) years documented experience. 1.07 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Construct a field sample panel, one window unit, as selected illustrating complete blind

assembly with operable hardware and accessories.

12 51 20-2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

C. Provide field sample after submitted shop drawings are approved. D. Locate where directed. E. If accepted, field sample will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Field

sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or

marring of surfaces. C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00. D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or

warping. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish ten (10) additional slats under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Furnish two additional complete blind assemblies of each size. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hunter Douglas - Decor 1". B. Levolor Model Riviera 1". C. Bali D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Louver Slats: One inch wide; .008 inch thick spring tempered prefinished aluminum

horizontal slats, with manufacturing burrs removed; radiused slat corners and with ther-mostop.

B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene, ladder configuration. C. Head Rail Housing: Prefinished, formed steel box, internally fitted with hardware,

pulleys and bearings for blind operation. D. Cord: Braided polypropylene, continuous loop, looped through wall mounted spring

tensioned pulley. E. Control Wand: Square shape, non-removable type, length of window opening height less

12 inches.

WCPS: North High HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 51 20-3 - Health Suite Expansion

F. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.03 FACTORY FINISHING A. Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: color as selected with same color on both sides of slat. B. Cord and Control Wand: color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Do not commence fabrication until field measurements are confirmed. C. Ensure structural supports are correctly placed. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Provide at window Type ‘A’ at Room 103.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 2

SITE WORK



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

SECTION 02 22 50 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

WCPS: North High MINOR DEMOLITION 02 22 50-1 - Health Suite Expansion FOR REMODELING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Demolishing designated building equipment and fixtures. 2. Demolishing designated construction. 3. Cutting and alterations for completion of the Work. 4. Protecting items designated to remain. 5. Removing demolished materials.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Demolition Schedule: Indicate overall schedule and interruptions required for utility and building services.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate location of items designated for reuse and Owner’s retention. 2. Indicate location and construction of temporary work.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, concealed utilities discovered during demolition, and subsurface obstructions.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit description of system, inspection data, and parts lists.


A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection.

B. Conform to applicable codes for procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.

C. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Perform Work in accordance with State of Maryland and City of Hagerstown standards.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

02 22 50-2 MINOR DEMOLITION WCPS: North High FOR REMODELING - Health Suite Expansion

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.

B. Sequence demolition activities in accordance with the proposed project phasing.

C. Owner will conduct salvage operations before demolition begins to remove materials Owner chooses to retain.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Section 01 32 30 – Network Analysis Schedules: Requirements for scheduling.

B. Schedule Work to coincide with construction.

C. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling noisy operations and waste removal that may impact Owners operation in adjoining spaces.

D. Perform noisy, malodorous, dusty work in accordance with all local ordinances.

E. Coordinate utility and building service interruptions with Owner. 1. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without three

days prior written notice to Owner. 2. Schedule tie-ins to existing systems to minimize disruption. 3. Coordinate Work to ensure fire sprinklers, fire alarms, smoke detectors,

emergency lighting, exit signs and other life safety systems remain in full operation in occupied areas.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.

B. Mark location and termination of utilities.

C. Erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices at locations indicated, including warning signs and lights, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, and existing improvements indicated to remain.

D. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.

WCPS: North High MINOR DEMOLITION 02225-3 - Health Suite Expansion FOR REMODELING

E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy.

F. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safety of existing structure.

G. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.

H. Do not close or obstruct building egress path.

I. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner.

3.2 SALVAGE REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner has first rights of refusal for all equipment and materials.

B. Coordinate with Owner to identify building components and equipment required to be removed and delivered to Owner.

C. Tag components and equipment Owner designates for salvage.

D. Protect designated salvage items from demolition operations until items can be removed.

E. Carefully remove building components and equipment indicated to be salvaged.

F. Disassemble as required to permit removal from building.

G. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss.

H. Mark equipment and packaged parts to permit identification and consolidation of components of each salvaged item.

I. Prepare assembly instructions consistent with disassembled parts. Package assembly instructions in protective envelope and securely attach to each disassembled salvaged item.

J. Deliver salvaged items to Owner. Obtain signed receipt from Owner.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

B. Maintain protected egress from and access to adjacent existing buildings at all times.

C. Do not close or obstruct roadways and sidewalks without permits.

D. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer and Owner.

E. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas.

02 22 50-4 MINOR DEMOLITION WCPS: North High FOR REMODELING - Health Suite Expansion

F. Cap and identify abandoned utilities at termination points when utility is not completely removed. Annotate Record Drawings indicating location and type of service for capped utilities remaining after demolition.

G. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements, and supporting structural members.

H. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

I. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.

J. Remove temporary Work.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 3

CONCRETE



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 03 34 60 - Concrete Floor Finishing: Reinforcement for concrete floor

toppings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual. D. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ANSI/ASTM A184 - Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete

Reinforcement. F. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

G. ANSI/ASTM A496 - Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

H. ANSI/ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. I. ANSI/AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel.

J. ANSI/AWS D12.1 - Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. K. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. L. ASTM A704 - Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. M. AWS D12.1 - Welding Reinforcement Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced

Concrete Construction. N. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice. O. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars. P. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and

Nomenclature.

03 20 00-2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel

and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Provide Architect/Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of

reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection.

1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, plain to

ASTM A767, Class I finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 Plain Type in flat sheets; Class I finish. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of

reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture.

C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete

Surfaces: Plastic coated Stainless steel type; size and shape as required. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318. B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review

location of splices with Architect/Engineer.

WCPS: North High CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from

required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: Item Coverage Beams 2 inch

Supported Slabs and Joists 1 inch Column Ties 1-1/2 inch Walls (exposed to weather or backfill) 2 inch

Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 inch Slabs on Fill Mid depth 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members, floors, shear walls, foundation walls,

and supported slabs. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Beneath slab vapor barriers for general slabs and slabs with athletic wood floors.

D. Control, expansion, and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Equipment pads, light pole base, flagpole base, thrust blocks, and miscellaneous items. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint device and joint device

anchors in formwork. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories. B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03 34 60 - Concrete Floor Finishing.

D. Section 03 37 00 - Concrete Curing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing

Concrete. D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. G. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. H. ANSI/ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). I. ANSI/ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type. J. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

K. ANSI/ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

L. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and

Tubes. M. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. N. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. O. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. P. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. Q. ASTM C330 - Light Weight Aggregates For Structural Concrete. R. ASTM C494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. S. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral

Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures and

curing compounds.

C. Submit mix designs (by a qualified testing laboratory) for pea gravel and normal concrete. Submit procedures to be followed for hot weather and cold weather construction. Submittals must be made prior to any installations.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are

concealed from view. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and

placement of form accessories.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type; manufactured by St. Lawrence

Cement or Lehigh Cement Co. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260; Daravair 1,000 or equal manufactured by W. R. Grace. B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type A - Water Reducing, Type D - Water Reducing and

Retarding, Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating, admixture; such as Dozough manufactured by Master Builders.

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,

water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.

2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type A: Flexible foam expansion joint filler complying with ASTM D1752,

Sections 5.1 through 5.4; 2 inch thick, equal to Ceramar by W. R. Meadows with water absorption of 0.246% of volume as tested in accordance with ASTM D545.

B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral; 1/8 inch thick, formed to tongue and groove

profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.

C. Sealant and Primer: Type, as specified in Section 07 90 00. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 2. B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 2. C. Provide concrete to the following criteria:

1. Design Mix 7 Day Strength 28 Day Strength 3,000 psi 1,950 psi 3,000 psi 4,000 psi 2,600 psi 4,000 psi

2. Slump: per ASTM C-94. D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.

Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.


E. Use of calcium chloride shall be prohibited. F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by

Architect/Engineer. G. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior at

5-7 percent air content. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete

are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding

agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing

concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304, ACI 301, ACI 318. B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers and joint devices are

not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal

watertight by sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends or taping edges and ends.

E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with

vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. High Performance Vapor Barriers used in conjunction with Athletic Wood Floor Vapor

Beneath Slab Vapor Barriers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions with self-adhered taped laps.

G. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. I. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface.

Conform to Section 07 90 00 for finish joint sealer requirements.


J. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. K. Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement

sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. L. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with

floor and wall finish. M. Install joint covers in longest practical length, when adjacent construction activity is

complete. N. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 90 00. O. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature,

and test samples taken. P. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction

joints. Q. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. R. Place floor slabs as indicated on structural drawings or submit actual plan of concrete

slab placement. S. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Using 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4

depth of slab thickness. T. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch

in 10 ft.

U. Consolidation of concrete shall be done in accordance with ACI 301. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed concrete walls, columns, and beams

with smooth rubbed finish. B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. C. Wood float surfaces which will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile with full bed setting

system. D. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring,

thin set quarry tile, thin set ceramic tile. E. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed. F. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to

drains at 1/8 inch per foot.

G. Apply cure and seal in accordance with Section 03 37 00 - Concrete Curing. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01 40 00.


B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for

review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified

requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cu yds of each class of

concrete placed. Cylinders shall be tested on 7 day and 28 day intervals. The third cylinder shall be tested if a failure should occur and be utilized as a comparison.

F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job

site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. One slump test and one air content test will be taken for each truck load in accordance

with ASTM and ACI Standards. 3.7 PATCHING A. If excessive honeycomb or embedded debris is present in concrete when forms are

removed, this will not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. B. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions,

tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the

Architect/Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express

direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. 3.9 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES A. Foundation Walls and Footings: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish with honeycomb

filled surface.

B. Slabs on Grade: 4000 psi 28 day concrete, finish per Section 3.5.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 03 34 60-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 03 34 60 - CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finishing slabs on grade. B. Surface treatment with concrete hardener and sealer. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete slabs and toppings ready to

receive finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on finishing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility

and limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application

for both new and existing slabs. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sonneborn

B. Master Builders. C. Thoroseal. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS A. Chemical Hardener: Sonneborn - Lapidolith

03 34 60-2 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this Section. 3.2 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. B. Wood float surfaces which will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, with full bed setting

system. C. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring thin

set quarry tile thin set ceramic tile. D. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to

drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal or as indicated on Drawings. 3.3 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT A. Apply liquid hardener/sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions on scheduled

floor surfaces.

B. Finish to a polished sheen. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. C. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Carpeting: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3.5 SCHEDULES

A. All exposed new concrete: Liquid hardener/sealer. Three coat system. 1. First Coat: Dilute 1 Part Lapidolth to 4 parts water.

Apply at 200 to 300 sf per gallon. 2. Second Coat: Dilute 1 part Lapidolth to 3 parts water.

Apply at 200 to 300 sf per gallon 3. Third Coat: Dilute 1 part Lapidolth to 3 parts water.

Apply at 200 to 300 sf per gallon a. As third coat is drying, and a uniform appearance of white crystals are is

visible, flood the floor with water and buff with a commercial floor buffer using a 3M Black Pad or similar abrasive. Continue buffing until the floor acquires a patina or polish and the whiteness is gone.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CONCRETE CURING 03 37 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 03 37 00 - CONCRETE CURING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Initial curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 03 34 60 - Concrete Floor Finishing. - for exposed concrete slabs. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. D. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. E. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. F. ASTM D2103 - Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility

and limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sonneborn

03 37 00-2 CONCRETE CURING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Master Builders

C. Thoroseal.

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1-D Class A or B, Acrylic type, clear

without fugitive dye; equal to Kure-N-Seal WB as manufactured by Sonneborn.

B. Water: Potable and not detrimental to concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. 3.2 EXECUTION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. B. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions as follows: 1. First coat applied at rate of 200 to 400 sf/gallon.

C. Polyethylene Film: Spread polyethelene film over floor slab areas, lapping edges and sides

and sealing with pressure sensitive tape; cover with plywood; maintain in place for 7 days. 3.3 EXECUTION - VERTICAL SURFACES A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. B. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions for curing purposes.

C. Exposed concrete shall be cured and finished in accordance with Section 03 34 60. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 50 00. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 6

WOOD AND PLASTIC



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06 11 40-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 06 11 40 - WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wood furring and grounds.

B. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets and wood trim.

C. Telephone and electrical panel boards.

D. Preservative treatment of wood.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking.

B. Section 04 30 00 - Unit Masonry System: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking. C. Section 06 16 00 - Sheathing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards.

B. APA (American Plywood Association).

C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process.

D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire

Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

E. NFPA (National Forest Products Association).

F. RIS (Redwood Inspection Service).

G. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau).

H. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau).

I. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: In accordance with Section 01 33 00, submit manufacturer’s certification for pressure-treated and fire-treated lumber.

06 11 40-2 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber Grading Rules: WCLIB and WWPA.

B. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, S.P.F. species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat when wood is in contact with concrete, masonry or metal.

C. Plywood: APA Grade C-C-X; unsanded.

D. Particle board: Will not be acceptable.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood

locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield

and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment) EPA Approved: AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.060 L.I.S. CF retainage. 1. Products treated with “CCA” (chromated copper arsenate) will not be permitted. 2. “ACQ” (amine copper qust) or “CBA” (copper baron azole) treated products will

be acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING

A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. C. Construct curb members of single pieces.

D. Space framing and furring 16 inches oc.

E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by

alternating lapping side members.

F. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, and parapet construction.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Finish carpentry items, including finish trim.

B. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. B. Section 06 41 00 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. C. Section 08 21 10 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of wood partitions screens. E. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. AWI - Quality Standards. C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties

and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire

Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. E. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. F. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. G. HPMA (Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association) HP - American Standard for

Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.

H. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

I. NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association). J. NWWDA (National Wood Window and Door Association) I.S.4 - Water Repellent

Preservative Treatment for Millwork. K. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. L. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

06 20 00-2 FINISH CARPENTRY WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing

details, and accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft. C. Provide instructions for attachment hardware. D. Samples: Submit two samples of ballet bar, 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain and

specified finish. E. Submit two samples of wood trim six (6) inches long. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium Custom Economy quality. NHLA. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section

with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI Custom; white pine species,

maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

B. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI Custom Premium; Maple species,

maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1 Grade C-D; Graded in accordance with AWI Custom; veneer

lumber core; White Pine species, cut.

WCPS: North High FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

B. Wood Particleboard: Will not be allowed. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations

and stainless steel finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming: Softwood lumber of cedar species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. C. Wood Filler: Solvent Oil base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWI Custom standards. B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. C. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) matching hardwood veneer or

plastic laminate edging matching adjacent surface. Use one piece for full length only. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom Quality Standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do

not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install components and trim with nails, screws, or bolts with blind fasteners at 16 inch on

center. F. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

06 20 00-4 FINISH CARPENTRY WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CUSTOM CASEWORK 06 41 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 06 41 00 - CUSTOM CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. C. Prefinished surfaces and preparation for site finishing. D. Preparation for installing utilities.

E. Miscellaneous shelving and built-in storage units.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. B. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not specified in this section. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. B. AWI - Quality Standards. C. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood. D. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. E. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative

Laminates. F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes.

C. Product Data: Submit data for hardware accessories.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two, 12 x 12 inch size samples, illustrating cabinet finish. 2. Submit two, 12 x 12 inch size samples, illustrating counter top finish. 3. Submit two samples of drawer pulls, hinges and door glides, illustrating hardware

finish.

06 41 00-2 CUSTOM CASEWORK WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI Premium quality; perform drawer

and door front construction in accordance with AWI Custom quality. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum ten years documented experience. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. B. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and

humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and design drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATORS

A. Cavetown Planing Mill, Cavetown, MD.

B. Maryland Millwork, Hagerstown, MD C. American Cedar and Millwork, Millersville, MD

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI Custom; average

moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame Maple Plain-Slice Exposed Stiles and Rails Maple Plain-Slice Internal Construction Douglas Fir Plain-Slice


2.3 SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer,

type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Door and Drawer Fronts Maple Plain Slice Drawer Construction Maple Plain Slice Gables and Backs Maple Plain Slice

B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Minimum 3/4 inches thick graded in accordance with AWI “Premium” grade and make with high waterproof resin adhesive and sanded faces.

C. Hardboard: is not acceptable. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE

A. Formica Product, HGPL.

B. Nevamar

C. WilsonArt D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.5 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: AWI, 0.050 inch General Purpose quality; color, pattern, and surface

texture as selected. B. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate.

C. Interior Liner: Melamine 0.20 inch NEMA Cl20 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI and laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Edge Trim: 1. Vinyl Tee Moulding: Extruded convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated

tongue; of width to match component thickness; color as selected. 2. PVC Edge Band: Extruded Thermoplastic PVC; smooth finish 3 mm thickness x

full width of edge; hot melt adhered; color as selected. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application;

chromium plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. E. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

F. Hardware: (Color to be selected by the Owner and Architect) All hardware shall be equal to Doug Mockett and Company unless otherwise noted. 1. Grommet: XG - 3" flip top 2. Self-Closing Drawer Slide: Haffle 422.86 Series (Black) 3. Pulls: Haffle 101.79.604 4. Hinges: Haffle 354.65.410 5. Cabinet Locks: Haffle 232.35 Series

06 41 00-4 CUSTOM CASEWORK WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

2.7 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage

through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one

piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush style. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured

sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arrises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. H. Fabricate metal countertop surfaces pressure glued to plywood core backing with butt

welded joints with spline and without visible joints. I. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. J. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and inserts. Verify locations of cutouts from

on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. 2.8 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive semi-transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only. E. Seal stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush

apply only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify locations and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.


C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch.

Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of

species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Seal all joints. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01 70 00. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 7

THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.

D. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

E. Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.

D. Do not apply protection course over liquid applied waterproofing membranes

containing volatile solvents until all of the solvent has evaporated.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of

installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board

materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board

insulation in each area of construction.

07 21 00-2 THERMAL INSULATION WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION (SOUND ATTENUATION)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Thermafiber. 4. Or approved equal.

B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.2 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type. c. Or approved equal.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers. b. Or approved equal.

2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. Gemco; R-150. c. Or approved equal.

WCPS: North High THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Where indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing

members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of

construction.

C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

07 21 00-4 THERMAL INSULATION WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Preparing substrate surfaces.

B. Sealant and joint backing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Sealants required in conjunction with

cast-in-place concrete. B. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames: Sealants required in conjunction with door frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. B. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. D. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. G. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers

(Open-Cell Foam). H. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide

Specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance

criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1 x 4 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation,

and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.

07 90 00-2 JOINT SEALERS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during

and after installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with other trades. B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Pecora

B. Tremco

C. Bostik

D. Sika E. Substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

2.2 SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Sealant (Type A): ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class A, chemical curing,

non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type; color as selected; Dynatrol II manufactured by Pecora.

1. Elongation Capability 50 percent 2. Service Temperature Range -20 to 180 degrees F

3. Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35 B. Silicone Sealant (Type B): ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; single

component, fungus resistant, chemical curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected; 860 manufactured by Pecora.

1. Elongation Capability 25 percent 2. Service Temperature Range -75 to +400 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 50 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

WCPS: North High JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1565; round, open cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to

50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required 2:1 width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 50 00.

07 90 00-4 JOINT SEALERS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.6 SCHEDULE

General: The following sealants shall be installed throughout the construction where construction materials intersect or abut creating a joint which requires closure for appearance, weather, or as may be required by the Owner and Architect.

Location Type

A. Interior vertical & horizontal joints Two part polyurethane Type II (Type A)

B. Interior wet areas, kitchen, & toilet High modulus silicone fixtures joints w/fungicide (Type B)

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 8

DOORS AND WINDOWS



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 08 11 00 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes steel doors, panels and frames; non-rated and fire rated, and interior borrowed light frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, internal reinforcement, cut-outs for glazing, louvers, jamb and door selections and finishes.

B. Product Data: Submit door and frame configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI 250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. DHI - Door Hardware Institute - The Installation of Commercial Steel

Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.

B. Fire Rated Door and Panel Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.

C. Fire Rated Stair Doors: Rate of rise of 450 degrees F across door thickness.

D. Installed Fire Rated Door and Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated on Drawings.

E. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door. 1. Indicate temperature rise rating for stair doors.

F. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 255.

G. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation material.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Pioneer Industries. 4. Republic Builders Products. 5. Steelcraft. 6. Curries.

08 11 00 -2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

7. Substitutions: Permitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

B. Product Description: Standard shop fabricated steel doors, door panels, and frames; fire rated and non-rated types; flush face or stile and rail design, and door louvers.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Interior Doors (Non-Rated): SDI 108, 1-3/4 inch thick. 1. Level 3 - Extra heavy Duty, Model 2, seamless design.

B. Interior Frames: 1. Level 3 for Door Models 2, nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material,

base metal thickness.

C. Door Core: Polystyrene foam and steel channel grid.

D. End Closure: Channel, 0.04 inch thick, inverted.

E. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R-Value of 4, measured in accordance with ASTM C1363.

F. Sound Rated Door: STC of 32, measured in accordance with ASTM E413.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Door Louvers: Roll formed material; Inverted Y blade, sight proof; prime painted.

B. Silencers: Resilient vinyl fitted into drilled hole.

C. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape.

D. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, specifically for double doors.

E. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion.

F. Primer: ANSI A250.10 rust inhibitive type.

G. Weatherstripping: Specified in Section 08 71 00.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place. Protect frame hardware preparations with mortar guard boxes.

B. Attach astragal to one leaf of pairs of doors.

C. Fabricate frames as face welded units.

D. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with head member as detailed.

E. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

F. Prepare interior frames for silencers and install.

WCPS: North High STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 3 - Health Suite Expansion

G. Frame Mullions for Double Doors: Removable type, with profile matching jambs.

H. Frame Transom Bars: Fixed type, with profile matching jamb and head.

I. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated door and frame.

2.5 SHOP FINISHING

A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M A60.

B. Primer: Baked.

C. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710.

C. Coordinate door frames with masonry, gypsum board wall construction for frame anchor placement.

D. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.

E. Install door louvers plumb and level.

F. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.

G. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

H. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge,

corner to corner.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High WOOD DOORS 08 21 00 - 1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 08 21 00 - WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wood doors fire rated and non-rated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, cutouts for glazing and hardware preparation.

B. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of door veneer, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating wood grain, veneer pattern, veneer joints, color, and finish.


A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA I.S.1.

B. Fire Rated Door and Panel Construction: Conform to one of the following: 1. NFPA 252; with neutral pressure level at 40 inches maximum above sill at

5 minutes into test. 2. UL 10C. 3. 20-Minute Fire Rated Corridor Doors: Fire tested without hose stream test.

C. Fire Rated Stair Doors: Rate of rise of 450 degrees F across door thickness.

D. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated on Drawings.

E. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Furnish lifetime manufacturer warranty to include delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

B. Furnish manufacturer’s Life of Installation warranty for interior doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD DOORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Weyerhauser. 4. Mohawk Doors. 5. Graham. 6. Substitutions: Permitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

08 21 00-2 WOOD DOORS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Product Description: Solid core wood doors, fire rated, non-rated; flush and design; wood veneer site finished. 1. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core seven ply construction;

fire acoustical as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Core: 1. Core (Solid, Non-Rated): NWWDA, Type Structural composite lumber core.

B. Flush Door Facing: 1. Wood Veneer: NWWDA Grade 1 - Premium; Maple species wood, plain

sliced with book match grain, for transparent finish. a. Pair match multiple door leaves in single opening.

2. Adhesive: NWWDA, Type I - waterproof.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Glass Stops: Wood of same species as door facing type conform to UL requirements.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with NWWDA I.S.1 requirements.

B. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, recessed at face edge.

C. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement blocking in place.

D. Factory machine doors for finish hardware.

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

2.5 FINISH

A. Custom factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.

B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with NWWDA I.S.1 requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.

C. Install door louvers plumb and level.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of steel frames specified in Section 08 11 00 and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. Glass specified in Section 08 80 00.

WCPS: North High WOOD DOORS 08 21 00 - 3 - Health Suite Expansion

E. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

F. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/4 inch measured with straight edge,

corner to corner.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE (Revised July 30, 2014) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hardware for hollow steel and wood doors.

B. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08 11 10 – Steel Doors and Frames

B. Section 08 21 00 – Wood Doors

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 – Standard for Accessibility and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2003

B. BHMA A156.1 – Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2006

C. BHMA A156.3 – Standard for Exit Devices; 2008

D. BHMA A156.4 – Standard for Door Controls-Closers; 2008

E. BHMA A156.5 – Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products; 2001

F. BHMA A156.6 – Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2005

G. BHMA A156.7 – Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; 2009

H. BHMA A156.8 – Standard for Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders; 2005

I. BHMA A156.13 – Standard for Mortise Locks and Latches; 2005

J. BHMA A156.15 – Standard for Release Devices-Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; 2006

K. BHMA A156.16 – Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2008

L. BHMA A156.18 – Standard for Material and Finishes; 2006

M. BHMA A156.19 – Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors; 2007

N. BHMA A156.21 – Standard for Thresholds; 2009

O. BHMA A156.22 – Standard for Door Gasketing Systems; 2005

P. BHMA A156.25 – Standard for Electrified Locking Devices; 2007

Q. BHMA A156.26 – Standard for Continuous Hinges; 2006

R. BHMA A156.28 – Standard for Keying Systems; 2007

S. BHMA A156.29 – Standard for Exit Locks, Exit Locks with Exit Alarms, Exit Alarms and Alarms for Exits; 2007

T. BHMA A156.30 – Standard for High Security Cylinders; 2003

08 71 00-2 DOOR HARDWARE WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

U. DHI A115 Series – Specification for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; current edition

V. DHI (LOCS) – Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990

W. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007

X. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire

Protection Agency; 2006

Y. UL (BMD) – Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.; current edition 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit electronic copies of the hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01 33 00

in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking. The hardware schedule shall clearly indicate the architect’s hardware set and manufacturer of each proposed item. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the hardware schedule.

2. Provide electronic copies of illustrations from the manufacturers catalogs and data in brochure form.

3. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable items and proposed substitutions in the hardware schedule.

4. Furnish hardware samples for design and finish as requested by the architect. These samples may remain part of the project as long as product is protected from damage and remain in new condition.

5. Provide a keying schedule using keyset symbols referenced in the Door and Hardware Institute manual “Keying Systems and Nomenclature”. The keying schedule shall be indexed by door number, keyset and hardware heading number and shall include cross keying instructions and special stamping instructions.

6. Provide a complete and detailed system of operating and elevation diagrams specifically developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens and door position switches are specified. Provide these diagrams with the hardware schedule submittal, for approval. The following shall be included:

a. System schematic b. Point to point wiring diagram c. Riser diagram d. Elevation of each door e. Detail interface between electrified hardware and associated trades.

B. Manufacturers Installation Instructions:

1. Provide manufacturers written installation and adjustment instructions for each item of hardware. Send installation instructions to the site with hardware.

C. Maintenance Data:

1. Submit three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing the following information:

a. Complete information in the care, maintenance, lubrication, adjustment and preservation of finishes.

b. Data on repair and replacement parts. c. Catalog pages for each product. d. Name, address and phone number of the local representative for each

manufacturer.


D. Keys: 1. Deliver with identifying tags to the Owner by security shipment direct from the

hardware supplier.

E. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer’s written warranty and assure that forms have been completed in

the owner’s name and registered with the manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. NFPA 101 2. NFPA 80

B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. Obtain each item of hardware (i.e. hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, closers) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door

hardware with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. The hardware supplier shall have warehousing facilities with-in 100 miles of the project and employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. This consultant shall be available to the architect and general contractor during normal operating hours.

D. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality and

design. Any substitution of products not listed in the specifications must be approved by the architect ten (10) days prior to bid date to allow sufficient time for addendum to be added to the bid documents. All requests are to be in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements and are to be in writing, hand delivered to the architect. All requests are to be accompanied by three (3) copies of the manufacturers brochures and a physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish.

E. Six (6) months after substantial completion of the project a factory representative of the

provided material shall perform a jobsite walk through. This will be done to determine if products are performing as recommended by the manufacturer and meet all fire and life safety requirements. Deficiencies due to installation shall be corrected by the general contractor and defective material shall be replaced by the hardware distributor.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for requirements pertaining to fire rated doors and frames.

B. All Hardware on Fire Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one (1) month prior to commencing work of this section with the owner to establish final keying and masterkey groups.

B. Prior to installation of the hardware, manufacturers’ representatives for locksets, exit devices

and closers shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractors personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the architect and owner.

C. The general contractor shall arrange a meeting with the architect and owner to establish security

requirements for this project. This meeting shall be conducted prior to erection of interior and exterior partitions to establish wire runs and location of junction boxes and power supplies.


1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door number and hardware item code to match the hardware schedule.

B. Deliver, store and handle packaged hardware to prevent damage to finishes and deterioration in

the product due to the elements.

C. Inventory door hardware upon receipt and provide a secure lock-up. 1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other trades directly affected involving the manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Furnish two (2) complete sets of templates for door and frame preparation with copies of the

final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to the hollow metal, wood door and aluminum door (if applicable) fabricators so as not to delay production.

C. Coordinate Owners keying requirements during the course of the work.

D. The general contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all Electrical System rough-in

and connections to electrified door hardware.

E. All aluminum door hardware shall be purchased from the same supplier as the hollow metal door hardware. Aluminum door hardware shall not be broken out as a separately purchased contract.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The warranty period shall be two (2) years from the date of substantial completion for all items of hardware unless noted otherwise.

B. The warranty period for locksets shall be ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion.

C. The warranty period for exit devices shall be five (5) years from the date of substantial completion.

D. The warranty period for manual door closers shall be ten (10) years from the date of substantial

completion.

E. All manufacturers screws and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be installed to maintain the warranty.

1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools as applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by the hardware component manufacturer.

C. Furnish three (3) dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type and finish used with

the hardware items provided. These screws and fasteners are to be delivered to the hardware installer for use during installation. All extra screws and fasteners and all special installation tools furnished with the hardware shall be turned over to the owner at the completion of the project.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Hinges: 1. McKinney Products Company (MK) 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BM) 3. Ives Hardware (IV)

B. Latchsets and Locksets:

1. Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series (RU) To Meet Owners Requirements 2. Schlage Lock Company L9000 Series (SC) 3. Yale Commercial Locks an d Hardware 8800FL Series (YA)

C. Interior Locks, Cylinders, Keys and Keying:

1. Corbin Russwin 39A Keyway (RU) No Substitutions

D. Manual Door Closers: 1. Corbin Russwin DC6000 Series (RU) 2. LCN Closers 4040 Series (LC) 3. Norton Door Controls 7500 Series (NO)

E. Overhead Stops and Holders:

1. Rixson (RF) 2. Glynn Johnson (GJ) 3. Sargent Manufacturing Company (SA)

F. Protection Plates:

1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RO) 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI) 3. Trimco (TR)

G. Door Stops:

1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RO) 2. Door Controls International (DC) 3. Trimco (TR)

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1 American National Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings

and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101 Life Safety Codes. 4. Applicable provisions of NFPA 80 Fire Rated Doors. 5. All hardware on fire rated doors and frames as listed and classified by UL as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Finishes: Identified in the hardware sets at the end of this section. 2.03 HINGES

A. Provide hinges as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Provide non-removable pin (NRP) feature, utilizing a pointed set screw, at exterior

openings and where listed in the hardware sets. 2. Provide electric hinges with standardized wire colors and concealed (Molex) plug

connectors to accommodate up to 12 wires. 3. Coordinate plug connectors so they plug directly into a wiring harness for connection to

electric locking devices and power supplies. 4. Provide hinges of original manufacturer only. Aftermarket or third party modification

and/or electrification of hinges is not acceptable.


5. Provide one field service kit and all necessary tools required for products that are not furnished with Molex connectors.

6. Electric hinges to be installed at the middle hinge location. 7. Screws shall be flat-head Phillips finished to match the hinge. 8. Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12 x 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood screws

provided by the manufacturer for wood doors. 2.04 MORTISE LOCKSETS

A. Provide lock functions and trim as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. BHMA ANSI Grade 1 2. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches. 3. Locks shall have field adjustable, beveled armored front, with a 1/8 inch thickness

minimum. 4. Latchbolt shall be two piece ¾ inch throw anti-friction stainless steel. 5. Deadbolt shall be a full one inch throw made of stainless steel and have two (2)

hardened steel roller inserts. 6. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not

to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. 7. Power supplies for electrified mortise locks shall be furnished by the lockset

manufacturer. Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified mortise locks.

2.05 HIGH SECURITY CYINDERS

A. All cylinders shall meet the requirements of UL 437 including those for drill and pick resistance.

B. Pick Resistance: Cylinders shall incorporate two or more independent locking mechanisms, including:

1. A pin tumbler device with six top pin chambers, capable of masterkeying to accommodate various keying levels including masterkey level, grandmasterkey lavel and higher. Mushroom shaped driver pins shall be provided in all top pin chambers. Additionally, the pin chambers in the cylinder shall be countermilled to engage the lip of the mushroom top during a picking attempt.

2. Coded sidebar locking mechanisms operated independently from the six top pin tumbler devices. The sidebar shall be milled from nickel-silver, be physically capable of at least 2,500 different combinations and be operated by five coded stainless steel sidepins. The sidebars shall be reversible thus forming two distinct keyways per sidebar. False grooves around each sidepin for the sidebar shall offer additional pick resistance.

C. Drill Resistance: Cylinders shall incorporate hardened or case-hardened components to foil

drilling attacks, as follows: 1. Cylinder housing shall contain fixed in-place case-hardened inserts to protect the pin

tumbler shear line. 2. Cylinder plug shall contain case-hardened inserts to protect the pin tumbler shear line

and the sidebar. 3. Mushroom shaped stainless steel driver pins. 4. Sidepins shall be of stainless steel.

2.06 KEYING

A. All exterior locks and cylinders to be Grandmaster or Masterkeyed to the existing Washington Country Public Schools Corbin Russwin Pyramid PS key system as required by the owner.

B. All interior locks and cylinders to be Grandmaster or Masterkeyed to the existing Washington

Country Public Schools Corbin Russwin 39A restricted keyway key system as required by the owner.

C. All interior locks and cylinders to be construction masterkeyed using the lost ball method.


D. Keying requirements to be coordinated and completed at factory to protect the integrity of the system. Field keying will not be permitted and will be considered as just cause for rejection of supplier.

E. Cylinders shall be an integral part of the locks as manufactured by specified lock supplier.

Substitution of foreign made cylinders or components will not be allowed and also will be cause for rejection of supplier.

F. Provide quantities of keys as follows:

1. Six (6) each grandmasterkeys 2. Six (6) each masterkeys each group 3. Ten (10) each construction masterkeys 4. Three (3) each change keys per lock or cylinder

G. Provide nickel-silver keys.

H. All keys to be stamped with the keyset symbol and “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.

I. All permanent cores to be stamped with the keyset symbol in a concealed location.

J. Provide a factory issued bitting list indicating the key cut numbers corresponding with the

keyset symbol.

K. Provide a key control system BHMA grade 1 including key holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key gathering envelopes and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in a metal cabinet with baked enamel finish and locking hardware. The general contractor shall verify that the key cabinet is installed per the owners location.

1. Furnish a wall mounted cabinet with hinged panel door equipped with key holding panels and pin tumbler cylinder door lock.

2. Furnish key holding capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks and cylinders. 3. Furnish a cross index system. 4. Key cabinet to be set-up by the hardware supplier and to include three-way indexing

paper schedules in a hard bound binder, CD-ROM disc copy, tagging of change keys and installing tags on the key cabinet hooks.

L. The hardware supplier shall review the key system with the owners representative after all of the

operating keys have been tested in all cylinders by the general contractor, and the construction masterkeying is voided.

2.07 CLOSERS

A. Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA.

B. Heavy duty arms shall be provided with cast iron heavy duty soffit brackets. Stamped bracket material will not be acceptable.

C. Provide drop plates, brackets or adaptors for door and frame as required to suit conditions.

D. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior of exterior doors and stair side of

stairway doors, unless noted otherwise.

E. Provide back-check for all closers.

F. Back-check and delayed-action feature (where specified) shall be provided with a standard pressure relief valve to protect the door from excessive force.

G. Closing speed, latching speed and back-check shall be controlled be separate key operated

valves. All valves to be captivated.

H. Closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade, secured by machine screws. Projection of the closer body from the door shall not exceed 2-3/16 inches.


2.08 DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES

A. Kickplates shall be .050 gauge and two (2) inches less the door width at single openings, and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, with four beveled edges (4BE), unless otherwise specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware sets.

B. Mop plates shall be .050 gauge and one (1) inch less the door width at single openings and one

(1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, with four beveled edges (4BE), unless otherwise specified.

C. Push/Pull plates shall be stainless steel and beveled on all four (4) edges, unless otherwise

noted.

D. Push/Pull plates shall be cut for cylinders and thumb-turns as required.

E. Provide all protection plates with countersunk screw holes and pan head machine or self tapping screws.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.

B. The general contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements

prior to installing interior hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free from defects.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and applicable codes. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in any other way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in Division 9 sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

B. Use templates provided by the hardware item manufacturer.

C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.

D. Set units level. Plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substrate

as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to which it is set.

F. Boxed power supplies shall be located as indicated, or if not indicated, above accessible ceilings

or in equipment rooms. Verify location with the architect.

G. Wires pulled per riser diagrams and electrical equipment mounted per installation instructions. Contractor shall be responsible for systems start-up, programming and computer training to end user. Include wire runs, gang boxes and junction boxes for openings specified to have future card readers.


H. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centerline of hardware item: 1. For steel doors and frames and wood doors comply with DHI Recommended Locations

for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Hardware locations for steel and wood doors shall be the same.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilation equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

B. Clean hardware surfaces soiled by installation or by work in adjacent areas.

3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage door hardware or finish. 3.05 DOOR HARDWARE SET Set: 01 – Toilet 3 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 630 MK 1 Privacy Set ML2060 NSA x M19V 626 RU 2 Mop Plate K1050 8" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK 630 TR 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Closer DC 6210, mounted parallel arm 652 RU Set: 02 – Hall 3 Hinge T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 630 MK 1 Mortise Set ML2053 NSA 626 RU 1 Kick Plate K0050 4" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK 630 TR 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Closer DC 6210, mounted parallel arm 652 RU 1 Wall Stop 1270CV TR Set: 03 – Principal Office 1 Mortise Set ML2052 NSA 626 RU

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High GLAZING 08 80 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section as required by Contract Documents.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with

ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to

project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Contract Drawings.

b. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass.

08 80 00-2 GLAZING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0

computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated including performance data for glass.

B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass. 1. Each color of float glass. 2. Wired glass. 3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Contract Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

D. Generally retain paragraph and subparagraph below unless types of glass selected do not require labeling by authorities having jurisdiction or if certification is required as well as labels. See Evaluations.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation

demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float and insulating glass.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.


D. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

E. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products

permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.

H. Conform to applicable requirements of Section 01351, Sustainable Project Requirements.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to the Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"


Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project Site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to the Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project Site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Safety Glass (Type G-4): Clear; fully tempered; conforming to ANSI A97.1 and CPSC 96 CFR (1201); 1/4 inch thick minimum.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 5. Any material indicated above.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.4 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a


release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to

continuous pressure.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inck thick minimum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size,

squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Contract Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project Site and legally dispose of off Project Site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces

of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.


3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.


C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 9

FINISHES



301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612

WCPS: North High METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM 09 11 10-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 09 11 10 - METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM


A. Formed metal stud framing at interior locations.

B. Framing accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Framing, sheathing and rough wood blocking.

B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation. C. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers.

D. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal studs for partitioning. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

B. ASTM A653/A653M-08 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

C. ASTM A924 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated.

D. ASTM A1003 – Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Carbon, Metallic and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.

E. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring

Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.

F. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.

G. GA 203 - Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to Receive Gypsum Board.

H. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA) - Guidelines for the Use of Metal

Framing.

I. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Metal stud framing system for interior walls, with batt type acoustic insulation specified in Section 07 21 00, and interior gypsum board specified in Section 09 26 00.

B. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and

suction of wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with code.

09 11 10-2 METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

C. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, anchorage to structure, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of other related work.

C. Describe method for securing studs to tracks, splicing, and for blocking and reinforcement

to framing connections.

D. Product Data: Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, and limitations.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with GA 203 and ASTM C754.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.

B. Coordinate with the placement of components within the stud framing system, specified in Section 06 11 40 and Divisions 15 and 16.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs: Meeting requirements of ASTM C645; C-Channel, roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A1003 and ASTM A653 G40 or equivalent corrosion resistant coating, depth as detailed:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dietrich UltraSTEEL Framing (20 gauge equivalent).

a. UltraSTEEL Fire rated partitions to be installed in accordance with UL V450, V438, or V419.

2. Thickness: Interior - 20 gauge.

B. Runners: Of same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs with provision for crimp locking to stud. Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer.

WCPS – ‘West City’ METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM 09 11 10-3 Elementary School

C. Deflection Track Slotted: Manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track: punched with vertical slots in both legs. Steel Sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection from structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: Dietrich Metal Framing, SLP-

TRK Slotted Deflection Track by Brady Innovations or equivalent. D. Channel Bridging or Bracing: U-Channel Assembly; Base metal thickness of .0538 inch

and minimum ½ inch wide flanges. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dietrich Metal Framing: Spazzer

5400 Bridging and Bracing Bar (SPZS) and Spazzer Bar Guard (SPBG). 2. U-Channel Assembly: 1 ½ inches a. Dietrich Metal Framing; Easy Clip U-Series Clip Angle or equivalent.

E. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit purpose.

F. Fasteners: GA 203. Self drilling, self tapping screws.

G. Sheet Metal Backing: 18 gage galvanized steel for reinforcement.

H. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. Drilled expansion bolts. Screws with sleeves.

I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate assemblies to sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements.

B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Studs and Track: Galvanize to G40 (minimum) coating class. B. Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class.

C. Accessories: Same finish as framing members. ASTM A123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft.



B. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work.

C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.2 ERECTION

A. Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 754

B. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches oc.

09 11 10-4 METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs.

D. Install studs vertically at 16 inches oc.

E. Align stud web openings horizontally.

F. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld.

G. Stud splicing not permissible.

H. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs.

I. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from each side of openings.

J. Brace stud framing system rigid.

K. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames, window frames, and

markerboards, chalkboards and tackboards; install supports and attachments.

L. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing.

M. Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing

fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and chalkboards, markerboards and tackboards.

N. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for

partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.

O. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing

erection. END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 26 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 09 26 00 – GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and

conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that

are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not

limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

09 26 00-2 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. G-P Gypsum. b. Lafarge North America Inc. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: 1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.

a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by G-P Gypsum.

2. Complying with ASTM C1177/C 1177M. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

"DensArmor Plus Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 3. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint

compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.


2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged

surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,

fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose

compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing

panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly

adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel

members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size

recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."


A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,

and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.


B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends

with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where

intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above

ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or

smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at

structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing),

unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in

alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to

framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill

screws.


B. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying

base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

C. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces

to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Professional for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.


3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges

not intended for tape. D. Provide the following level of finish in accordance with the Gypsum Construction

Handbook – Latest Edition. 1. Level of Finish Schedule: a. Level 0 – Temporary Construction. b. Level 1 – Plenum areas above ceilings or areas not exposed to view. c. Level 2 – WR Gypsum backing board being used for tile substrate. d. Level 3 – Gypsum board scheduled to relieve heavy textured

finishes or commercial grade wall coverings. e. Level 4 – Gypsum board scheduled to receive light textured

finishes or residential grade wall coverings. f. Level 5 – All gypsum board scheduled to receive paint finish.

E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High CERAMIC TILE 09 31 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 09 31 00 – CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Glazed wall tile. 2. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 3. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. 4. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated.

B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).

C. Delete paragraph above or below. Retain above if actual sizes are specified for tile facial dimensions in Part 2 "Tile Products" Article. Retain below if nominal sizes are specified.

D. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

09 31 00-2 CERAMIC TILE WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Metal edge strips.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent

of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Daltile Corp. (Basis of Design)

B. American Olean

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile

sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Wall Tile (W4): Flat tile as follows: 1. Daltile Semigloss/ Matte, 6’ x 6”, Color Group 1 or 2 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch 3. Face: Plain with cushioned edges. 4. Finish: Mat, clear glaze.

B. Tile Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat

tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer’s standard shapes:

a. Base: Coved.


b. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. c. External Corners for Thinset Installations: Surface bullnose. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved

base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.

C. Accessories for Glazed Wall Tile: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, in color and finish to match adjoining wall tile, and intended for installing by same method as adjoining wall tile.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor

finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

2.5 CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.

B. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with high-strength, nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches wide by 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Available Product: Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.

2.6 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with

Paragraph C-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl

acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-

butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies

with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

C. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

D. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

E. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex

form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider.


F. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same silicone rubber used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.

2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Available Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Available Products:

a. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245.

c. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. d. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, white zinc alloy exposed-edge material.

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5

percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating

that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.


2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films,

and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching

compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as

joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Refer to TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" and to ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for data on expansion joints. Both require joint locations to be indicated on Drawings. There is no substitute for showing all joints on Drawings.

H. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in

Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

I. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial

portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

J. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.

3.4 CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.


B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

C. Provide crack isolation sheets over the entire concrete subfloor to receive tile work.

D. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series

tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. b. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with 1/8 inch joint widths.

C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar

bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

B. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.

C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Glass Tile: 1/16 inch.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout

manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.


B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.

B. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on crack-suppression membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F122 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over sound, dimensionally stable masonry or concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA W202 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.

B. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over gypsum board; thin-set mortar; TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.

C. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over cementitious backer units; thin-set mortar; TCA W244 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.

D. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar; TCA W245 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 51 10 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

WCPS: North High SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 10-1 - Health Suite Expansion


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim.

B. Acoustical tile.

C. Non-fire rated assembly. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 13 85 00 - Addressable Fire Alarm Systems: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.

B. Section 15 50 00 - Fire Protection: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.

C. Section 15 70 00 - Air Distribution System: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.

D. Section 16 50 00 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and

Lay-in Panels. C. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction

and Manufactured Housing. D. ASTM E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. E. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. F. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings:

Use and Practice. G. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

09 51 10-2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.

C. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components, and acoustical units.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of

acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner,

cross runner, and edge trim. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter

conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility requirements for materials. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40

percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

C. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Provide 5 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of extra tile to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Specified Manufacturer: Armstrong.

WCPS – ‘West City’ SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 10-3 Elementary School

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Chicago. 2. Donn.

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T paired access T;

components die cut and interlocking. 1. Use Armstrong's Prelude Plus XL15/16 inch w/Type 1 and Type 3 ceilings.

2. Use Armstrong’s AL Prelude Plus 15/16 inch w/Type 2Ceiling.

B. Grid Materials: Cold rolled steel.

1. Prelude Plus 15/16 inch: Galvanized and coated steel with aluminum cap as required.

C. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. D. Grid Finish: color as selected. E. Accessories: Stabilizer bars clips splices edge moldings and hold down clips required for

suspended grid system. F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and

ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Specified Manufacturer: Armstrong

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers 1. USG 2. Celotex. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL UNIT MATERIALS A. Acoustical Panels: (C1) Type 1 - Armstrong Fine Fissured - 1714 conforming to the

following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 3. Composition: Mineral. 4. Density: .70 lb/sq ft. 5. Light Reflectance: 85 percent. 6. NRC Range: .70 7. Fire Spread: 0-25 per ASTM E1264. 8. Edge: Square. 9. Surface Color: White 10. Surface Finish: Factory applied latex paint.

09 51 10-4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION - LAY-IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM A Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as

supplemented in this section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum.

C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers

with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the

nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently.

H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest

practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.

J. Form expansion joints where required. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch

movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis in

basket weave pattern. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

WCPS – ‘West City’ SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 10-5 Elementary School

D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut tile to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbet tile edge. Double cut

and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. G. Where bullnose concrete block corners round obstructions occur, provide preformed

closers to match edge molding. H. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl composition tile. C. Resilient base. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 15 00 – Alternates. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Floor substrate surface. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. FS L-F-1641 - Floor Covering, Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface, with Backing. C. FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing. D. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid. E. FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. F. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/ fuel/smoke rating requirements of in accordance

with ASTM E84. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available.

C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. D. Submit two samples 3 x 3 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor

material specified. E. Submit two 3 inch long samples of base material for each color specified. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 73 00.

09 65 00-2 RESILIENT FLOORING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve

temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to,

during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 100 sq ft of each color of selected flooring and 1 coil of each base color of each

material specified under provisions of Section 01 73 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS – VINYL TILE FLOORING

A. Armstrong. (Basis of Design) B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Tile (F1): Equal to Armstrong Standard Excelon Imperial Texture, 12” x 12”, 1/8”

thick, ASTM F 1066, Class 2. Color selected from standards. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BASE MATERIALS A. Flexco. B. Johnsonite. C. Mercer. D. Roppe E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.4 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: (B1) FS SS-W-40, extruded rubber; 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; coiled stock, (120

lineal feet per coil); top set coved. Corners field fabricated with minimum 12 inch returns.

B. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops of same material, size, and color as base. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material

manufacturer.

WCPS: North High RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-3 - Health Suite Expansion

B. Primers and Adhesives: types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Adhesive shall be equal to Armstrong's S-89 or S-90 Resilient Tile Adhesive.

C. Edge Strips: Flooring material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and

are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit

negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with subfloor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. E. Apply primer to surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place; press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile

patterns. F. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned and with pattern grain parallel for

all units and parallel to width of room. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.

G. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is

dissimilar. H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to

produce tight joints.

09 65 00-4 RESILIENT FLOORING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

J. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. K. Install flooring under movable partitions without interrupting floor pattern. L. Install feature strips, and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between

joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends use

premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.6 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage to finish. C. Striping, sealing, wax, and polish of floor finishes by Owner.

END OF SECTION

WCPS: North High PAINTING 09 90 00-1 - Health Suite Expansion

SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING


A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel - Field finish.

B. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist: Field finishing of exposed joist.

C. Section 05 31 10 - Steel Roof Deck: Field finish of exposed deck.

D. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop primed items.

E. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs - Field Finish.

F. Section 05 52 00 - Handrails and Railings - Field Finish.

G. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry - Field Finish.

H. Section 06 41 00 - Custom Casework - Field Finish.

I. Section 08 11 10 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames - Field Finish.

J. Section 08 21 10 - Flush Wood Doors

K. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems.

L. Division 23 - Mechanical Identification. and Painting of Exposed Ductwork

M. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.

B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.

C. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - C204 - Chlorinated Rubber-Alkyd Paint

Systems for the Exterior of Above Ground Steel Water Piping.

D. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - D102 - Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks.

E. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting.

F. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint

Specifications.

09 90 00-2 PAINTING WCPS: North High - Health Suite Expansion

G. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual.

H. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.

C. Samples: Submit two color chip selection catalogs illustrating range of colors available for each surface finishing product scheduled.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate

conditions requiring special attention. E. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint

manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

five (5) years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Provide field sample of paint under provisions of Section 01 40 00.

B. Provide field sample classroom, illustrating special coating color, texture, and finish.

C. Locate where directed.

D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.


B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum

of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside

the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior

or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 73 00.

B. Provide 1 gallon of each color, and type to Owner.

C. Label each container with color, type, texture, room locations, and in addition to the manufacturer's label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers - Paint 1. PPG. 2. Sherwin-Williams. 3. Benjamin Moore.

B. Manufacturers - Transparent Finishes

1. Min-Wax. 2. PPG Model REZ. 3. Valspar

C. Manufacturers - Stain

1. Min-Wax. 2. PPG Model REZ. 3. Valspar.


D. Manufacturers - Primer Sealers 1. PPG - 6 Line. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams. 4. Duron

E. Manufacturers - Block Filler

1. PPG - Line. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams/Duron.

F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials

not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

C. Patching Materials: Latex filler.

D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule. Colors will be selected during construction.



B. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.

D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove existing

coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.

C. Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. F. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects

after repair.

G. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

H. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt,

loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

I. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching

plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

J. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and

rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by power tool, wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

K. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.

L. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to

priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.

M. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit

prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.

N. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.

D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.

H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain

before set. Wipe excess from surface.

I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork with primer paint.

J. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00.

B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

3.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

A. NEW MASONRY 1. 1st Coat: Latex masonry block filler (PPG 6-7) 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Latex Semi-gloss Enamel (PPG 6-510) 3.6 WFT/coat

B. GYPSUM BOARD

1. 1st Coat: Latex flat enamel (PPG 6-2): 3.6 WFT 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Eggshell Latex enamel (PPG 6-411): 2.6 WFT/coat.

C. FERROUS METALS

1. 1st Coat: Primer - Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal primer 90-712 white WFT 4.8 mils.

2. 2nd & 3rd Coat: Pitt-Glaze Acrylic-Epoxy Semi-gloss coating, 16 line, WFT 6.0 mils.

D. WOOD DOORS 1. 1st Coat: Oil/Wiping Stain: Match existing wood with clear wood sealer. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Polyurethane Satin: (PPG 77-9) 3.0 WFT/coat.

E. WOOD PAINTED 1. lst Coat (Primer): Enamel undercoater (PPG 6-6): 3.5 WFT/coat. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Semi-gloss Alykd Oil Based Enamel (PPG 6-90): 3.6 WFT/coat.

F. METAL DOORS, TRIM

1. Touch-up existing primer. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Alkyd Lo-luster enamel (PPG 6-90) 3.5 WFT/coat.

END OF SECTION